FDC37C67X [SMSC]

ENHANCED SUPER I/O CONTROLLER WITH FAST IR; 增强的超级I / O控制器,提供快速IR
FDC37C67X
型号: FDC37C67X
厂家: SMSC CORPORATION    SMSC CORPORATION
描述:

ENHANCED SUPER I/O CONTROLLER WITH FAST IR
增强的超级I / O控制器,提供快速IR

多功能外围设备 微控制器和处理器 PC 时钟
文件: 总194页 (文件大小:536K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
FDC37C67x  
Enhanced Super I/O Controller with Fast IR  
FEATURES  
-
Programmable Precompensation  
Modes  
·
·
·
·
5 Volt Operation  
PC98/99 and ACPI 1.0 Compliant  
ISA Plug-and-Play Compatible Register Set  
Intelligent Auto Power Management  
·
Keyboard Controller  
-
-
-
-
-
8042 Software Compatible  
8 Bit Microcomputer  
2k Bytes of Program ROM  
256 Bytes of Data RAM  
Four Open Drain Outputs Dedicated  
for Keyboard/Mouse Interface  
Asynchronous Access to Two Data  
Registers and One Status Register  
Supports Interrupt and Polling Access  
8-Bit Counter Timer  
-
Shadowed Write-Only Registers for  
ACPI Compliance  
·
·
System Management Interrupt, Watchdog  
Timer  
2.88MB Super I/O Floppy Disk Controller  
-
-
Licensed CMOS 765B Floppy Disk  
Controller  
-
-
-
-
-
Software and Register Compatible  
with SMSC's Proprietary 82077AA  
Compatible Core  
Port 92 Support  
8042 P12 and P16 Outputs  
-
-
Supports Two Floppy Drives Directly  
Configurable Open Drain/Push-Pull  
Output Drivers  
·
Serial Ports  
-
-
Two Full Function Serial Ports  
High Speed NS16C550A Compatible  
UARTs with Send/Receive 16-Byte  
FIFOs  
Supports 230k and 460k Baud  
Programmable Baud Rate Generator  
Modem Control Circuitry  
-
-
-
-
Supports Vertical Recording Format  
16-Byte Data FIFO  
100% IBM® Compatibility  
Detects All Overrun and Underrun  
Conditions  
-
-
-
Sophisticated Power Control Circuitry  
(PCC) Including Multiple Powerdown  
Modes for Reduced Power  
Consumption  
480 Address and Eight IRQ Options  
·
Infrared Port  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Multiprotocol Infrared Interface  
128-Byte Data FIFO  
IrDA 1.1 Compliant  
TEMIC/HP Module Support  
Consumer IR  
SHARP ASK IR  
-
-
-
DMA Enable Logic  
Data Rate and Drive Control Registers  
480 Address, Up to Eight IRQ and  
Three DMA Options  
Floppy Disk Available on Parallel Port Pins  
Enhanced Digital Data Separator  
·
·
480 Address, Up to Eight IRQ and  
Three DMA Options  
-
2 Mbps, 1 Mbps, 500 Kbps, 300  
Kbps, 250 Kbps Data Rates  
-
480 Address, Up to Eight IRQ and  
Three DMA Options  
·
Multi-Mode™ Parallel Port with  
ChiProtect™  
-
Standard Mode IBM PC/XT®, PC/AT®,  
and PS/2™ Compatible Bidirectional  
Parallel Port  
·
ISA Host Interface  
-
-
-
-
-
-
16-Bit Address Qualification  
8-Bit Data Bus  
-
Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP)  
Compatible - EPP 1.7 and EPP 1.9  
(IEEE 1284 Compliant)  
IOCHRDY for ECP and Fast IR  
Three 8-Bit DMA Channels  
Eight Direct Parallel IRQs  
Serial IRQ Option Compatible with  
Serialized IRQ Support for PCI  
Systems  
-
-
IEEE 1284 Compliant Enhanced  
Capabilities Port (ECP)  
ChiProtect Circuitry for Protection  
Against Damage Due to Printer  
Power-On  
·
100 Pin QFP Package  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
The FDC37C67x with Consumer IR and IrDA  
v1.1 support incorporates a keyboard interface,  
SMSC's true CMOS 765B floppy disk controller,  
advanced digital data separator, two 16C550  
compatible UARTs, one Multi-Mode parallel port  
which includes ChiProtect circuitry plus EPP  
and ECP, on-chip 24 mA AT bus drivers, two  
floppy direct drive support, Intelligent power  
management and SMI support. The true CMOS  
765B core provides 100% compatibility with IBM  
PC/XT and PC/AT architectures in addition to  
providing data overflow and underflow  
protection. The SMSC advanced digital data  
separator incorporates SMSC's patented data  
separator technology, allowing for ease of  
testing and use. Both on-chip UARTs are  
compatible with the NS16C550. The parallel  
port is compatible with IBM PC/AT architecture,  
as well as IEEE 1284 EPP and ECP. The  
FDC37C67x incorporates sophisticated power  
control circuitry (PCC). The PCC supports  
multiple low power down modes.  
The FDC37C67x supports the ISA Plug-and-  
Play Standard (Version 1.0a) and provides the  
recommended functionality to support Windows  
'95.  
The I/O Address, DMA Channel and  
Hardware IRQ of each logical device in the  
FDC37C67x may be reprogrammed through the  
internal configuration registers. There are 480  
I/O address location options, 8 parallel IRQs, an  
optional Serialized IRQ interface, and three  
DMA channels.  
The FDC37C67x does not require any external  
filter components and is therefore easy to use  
and offers lower system costs and reduced  
board area. The FDC37C67x is software and  
register compatible with SMSC's proprietary  
82077AA core.  
IBM, PC/XT and PC/AT are registered trademarks and PS/2 is a trademark  
of International Business Machines Corporation  
SMSC is a registered trademark and Ultra I/O, ChiProtect, and Multi-Mode  
are trademarks of Standard Microsystems Corporation  
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
FEATURES........................................................................................................................................1  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................2  
PIN CONFIGURATION.......................................................................................................................5  
DESCRIPTION OF PIN FUNCTIONS .................................................................................................6  
DESCRIPTION OF MULTIFUNCTION PINS.....................................................................................10  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................12  
SUPER I/O REGISTERS ..................................................................................................................12  
HOST PROCESSOR INTERFACE....................................................................................................12  
FLOPPY DISK CONTROLLER.........................................................................................................13  
FDC INTERNAL REGISTERS...........................................................................................................13  
COMMAND SET/DESCRIPTIONS....................................................................................................37  
INSTRUCTION SET .........................................................................................................................41  
SERIAL PORT (UART).....................................................................................................................67  
INFRARED INTERFACE ..................................................................................................................81  
FAST IR...........................................................................................................................................82  
PARALLEL PORT............................................................................................................................84  
IBM XT/AT COMPATIBLE, BI-DIRECTIONAL AND EPP MODES ....................................................86  
EXTENDED CAPABILITIES PARALLEL PORT.................................................................................93  
AUTO POWER MANAGEMENT.....................................................................................................109  
SERIAL IRQ...................................................................................................................................114  
GP INDEX REGISTERS .................................................................................................................119  
WATCH DOG TIMER.....................................................................................................................121  
8042 KEYBOARD CONTROLLER DESCRIPTION.........................................................................122  
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT INTERRUPT (SMI)................................................................................131  
CONFIGURATION .........................................................................................................................132  
3
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................160  
MAXIMUM GUARANTEED RATINGS*............................................................................................160  
DC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS ..........................................................................................160  
TIMING DIAGRAMS ......................................................................................................................164  
ECP PARALLEL PORT TIMING ....................................................................................................185  
80 Arkay Dr.  
Hauppauge, NY 11788  
(516) 435-6000  
FAX: (516) 273-3123  
4
PIN CONFIGURATION  
nACK  
BUSY  
PE  
SLCT  
VSS  
PD7  
PD6  
PD5  
PD4  
PD3  
PD2  
PD1  
PD0  
nSLCTIN  
nINIT  
VCC  
A20M  
KBDRST  
IRTX  
DRVDEN0  
DRVDEN1/IRMODE  
nMTRO  
nDS1  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
80  
79  
78  
77  
76  
75  
74  
73  
72  
71  
70  
69  
68  
67  
66  
65  
64  
63  
62  
61  
60  
59  
58  
57  
56  
55  
54  
53  
52  
51  
nDS0  
nMTR1  
VSS  
nDIR  
nSTEP  
nWDATA  
nWGATE  
nHDSEL  
nINDEX  
nTRK0  
nWRTPRT  
nRDATA  
nDSKCHG  
VCC  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
FDC37C67x  
100 PIN QFP  
CLOCKI  
SA0  
IRRX  
VSS  
SA1  
SA2  
SA3  
SA4  
SA5  
SA6  
SA7  
SA8  
MCLKK  
MDAT  
KCLK  
KDAT  
IOCHRDY  
TC  
VCC  
DRQ3/P12  
nDACK3/P16  
SA9  
SA10  
5
DESCRIPTION OF PIN FUNCTIONS  
NAME TOTAL  
PIN  
No./QFP  
BUFFER  
TYPE  
SYMBOL  
PROCESSOR/HOST INTERFACE (34)  
37:40,  
42:45  
20:30  
31  
System Data Bus  
8
SD[0:7]  
IO24  
11-bit System Address Bus  
Chip Select/SA11 (Note 1)  
Address Enable  
11  
1
SA[0:10]  
nCS/SA11  
AEN  
I
I
I
36  
1
55  
I/O Channel Ready  
1
IOCHRDY  
RESET_DRV  
OD24  
IS  
46  
ISA Reset Drive  
1
33  
Serial IRQ/Parallel IRQ_3  
1
SER_IRQ/  
IRQ3  
IO24/O24/  
D24  
(Note 0)  
32  
PCI Clock for Serial IRQ (33MHz/30MHz)/  
Parallel IRQ_4  
1
PCI_CLK/  
IRQ4  
IO24/O24/  
OD24  
(Note 0)  
50  
48  
52  
47  
49  
51  
DMA Request 1  
1
1
1
1
1
1
DRQ1  
DRQ2  
DRQ3/P12  
nDACK1  
nDACK2  
nDACK3/  
P16  
O24  
DMA Request 2  
O24  
DMA Request 3/8042 P12  
DMA Acknowledge 1  
DMA Acknowledge 2  
DMA Acknowledge 3/8042 P16  
O24/IO24  
I
I
I/IO24  
54  
34  
35  
Terminal Count  
I/O Read  
1
1
1
TC  
I
I
I
nIOR  
I/O Write  
nIOW  
CLOCKS (1)  
14.318MHz Clock Input  
19  
1
CLOCKI  
ICLK  
INFRARED INTERFACE (2)  
61  
62  
Infrared Rx  
Infrared Tx  
1
1
IRRX  
IRTX  
I
O24  
POWER PINS (8)  
18,53,  
65,93  
Power  
VCC  
6
DESCRIPTION OF PIN FUNCTIONS  
NAME TOTAL  
PIN  
No./QFP  
BUFFER  
TYPE  
SYMBOL  
VSS  
7,41,  
Ground  
60,76  
FDD INTERFACE (16)  
16  
11  
10  
12  
8
Read Disk Data  
Write Gate  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
nRDATA  
nWGATE  
nWDATA  
nHDSEL  
nDIR  
IS  
O24/OD24  
O24/OD24  
O24/OD24  
O24/OD24  
O24/OD24  
IS  
Write Disk Data  
Head Select  
Step Direction  
Step Pulse  
9
nSTEP  
17  
5
Disk Change  
Drive Select 0  
Drive Select 1  
Motor On 0  
nDSKCHG  
nDS0  
O24/OD24  
O24/OD24  
O24/OD24  
O24/OD24  
IS  
4
nDS1  
3
nMTR0  
6
Motor On 1  
nMTR1  
15  
14  
13  
1
Write Protected  
Track 0  
nWRTPRT  
nTRKO  
nINDEX  
DRVDEN0  
IS  
Index Pulse Input  
IS  
Drive Density Select 0  
O24/OD24  
2
Drive Density Select 1/IR Mode  
Select/IRRX3  
DRVDEN1/  
IRMODE/  
O24/OD24/  
O24/I  
IRRX3  
SERIAL PORT 1 INTERFACE (8)  
84  
85  
87  
Receive Serial Data 1  
1
1
1
RXD1  
TXD1  
I
Transmit Serial Data 1  
Request to Send 1  
O4  
O4/I  
nRTS1/  
SYSOP  
88  
89  
86  
91  
90  
Clear to Send 1  
1
1
1
1
1
nCTS1  
nDTR1  
nDSR1  
nDCD1  
nRI1  
I
Data Terminal Ready 1  
Data Set Ready 1  
Data Carrier Detect 1  
Ring Indicator 1  
O4  
I
I
I
SERIAL PORT 2 INTERFACE (8)  
95  
96  
Receive Serial Data 2/Infrared Rx  
Transmit Serial Data 2/Infrared Tx  
1
1
RXD2/IRRX  
TXD2/IRTX  
I
O24  
7
DESCRIPTION OF PIN FUNCTIONS  
PIN  
No./QFP  
BUFFER  
TYPE  
NAME  
TOTAL  
SYMBOL  
98  
Request to Send 2/Sys Addr 12/ Parallel  
IRQ_5  
1
nRTS2/SA12  
/IRQ5  
O4/I/O24/  
OD24  
(Note 0)  
99  
Clear to Send 2/Sys Addr 13/ Parallel  
IRQ_6  
1
1
1
nCTS2/SA13  
/IRQ6  
I/I/O24/  
OD24  
(Note 0)  
100  
97  
Data Terminal Ready/Sys Addr 14/ Parallel  
IRQ_7  
nDTR2/SA14  
/IRQ7  
O4/I/O24/  
OD24  
(Note 0)  
Data Set Ready 2/Sys Addr 15/ Parallel  
IRQ_10/nSMI  
nDSR2/SA15 I/I/O24/OD  
/IRQ10/  
24 (Note 0)  
nSMI  
94  
92  
Data Carrier Detect 2/8042 P12/ Parallel  
IRQ_11  
1
1
nDCD2/P12/  
IRQ11  
I/IO24/O24  
/OD24  
(Note 0)  
Ring Indicator 2/8042 P16/Parallel IRQ_12  
nRI2/P16/  
IRQ12  
I/IO24/O24  
/OD24  
(Note 0)  
PARALLEL PORT INTERFACE (17)  
68:75  
67  
Parallel Port Data Bus  
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PD[0:7]  
nSLCTIN  
nINIT  
IO24  
Printer Select  
OD24/O24  
66  
Initiate Output  
Auto Line Feed  
Strobe Signal  
OD24/O24  
82  
nALF  
OD24/O24  
83  
nSTROBE  
BUSY  
OD24/O24  
79  
Busy Signal  
I
I
I
I
I
80  
Acknowledge Handshake  
Paper End  
nACK  
78  
PE  
77  
Printer Selected  
Error at Printer  
SLCT  
81  
nERROR  
KEYBOARD/MOUSE INTERFACE (6)  
56  
57  
58  
59  
63  
Keyboard Data  
Keyboard Clock  
Mouse Data  
1
1
1
1
1
KDAT  
KCLK  
MDAT  
MCLK  
IOD16P  
IOD16P  
IOD16P  
IOD16P  
O4  
Mouse Clock  
Keyboard Reset  
KBDRST  
(Note 3)  
8
DESCRIPTION OF PIN FUNCTIONS  
PIN  
No./QFP  
BUFFER  
TYPE  
NAME  
TOTAL  
SYMBOL  
A20M  
64  
Gate A20  
1
O4  
Note 0:  
The interrupt request is output on one of the IRQx signals as an 024 buffer type. If EPP or  
ECP Mode is enabled, this output is pulsed low, then released to allow sharing of interrupts.  
In this case, the buffer type is OD24. Refer to the configuration section for more  
information.  
Note 1:  
For 12-bit addressing, SA0:SA11 only, nCS should be tied to GND. For 16-bit external  
address qualification, address bits SA11:SA15 can be "ORed" together and applied to nCS.  
The nCS pin functions as SA11 in full 16-bit Internal Address Qualification Mode. CR24.6  
controls the FDC37C67x addressing modes.  
Note 2:  
Note 3:  
The "n" as the first letter of a signal name indicates an "Active Low" signal.  
KBDRST is active low.  
Buffer Type Descriptions  
I
IS  
Input, TTL compatible.  
Input with Schmitt trigger.  
IOD16P Input/Output, 16mA sink, 90uA pull-up.  
IO24  
IO4  
O4  
O24  
OD24  
ICLK  
Input/Output, 24mA sink, 12mA source.  
Input/Output, 4mA sink, 2mA source.  
Output, 4mA sink, 2mA source.  
Output, 24mA sink, 12mA source.  
Output, Open Drain, 24mA sink.  
Clock Input  
9
DESCRIPTION OF MULTIFUNCTION PINS  
PIN  
ORIGINAL  
ALTERNATE  
FUNCTION 1  
IR MODE  
IRQ4  
ALTERNATE  
FUNCTION 2  
IRRX3  
NO./QFP FUNCTION  
DEFAULT  
DRVDEN1  
PCICLK  
SERIRQ  
nDACK3  
DRQ3  
nRI2  
nDCD2  
RXD2  
NOTE  
DRVDEN1  
PCICLK  
SERIRQ  
nDACK3  
DRQ3  
nRI2  
nDCD2  
RXD2  
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
6
6
2
32  
33  
51  
52  
92  
94  
95  
IRQ3  
8042 P16  
8042 P12  
8042 P16  
8042 P12  
IRRX  
IRQ12  
IRQ11  
TXD2  
IRTX  
TXD2  
96  
nDSR2  
nRTS2  
nCTS2  
nDTR2  
SA15  
SA12  
SA13  
SA14  
IRQ10  
IRQ5  
IRQ6  
IRQ7  
nDSR2  
nRTS2  
nCTS2  
nDTR2  
97  
98  
99  
100  
Note 1:  
Note 2:  
Note 3:  
Note 4:  
Note 5:  
Note 6:  
Controlled by IRMODSEL(LD8:CRC0.0) and IRRX3SEL(LD8:CRC0.4)  
Controlled by SERIRQSEL(LD8:CRC0.2)  
Controlled by DMA3SEL(LD8:CRC0.1)  
Controlled by 8042COMSEL(LD8:CRC0.3) and SERIRQSEL(LD8:CRC0.2)  
Controlled by IR Option Register( LD5:CRF1.6)  
Controlled by 16 bit Address Qual.(CR24.6) and SERIRQSEL(LD8:CRC0.2)  
For more information, refer to tables 65 through 75.  
10  
nSMI*  
SMI  
WDT  
PD0-7  
MULTI-MODE  
PARALLEL  
PORT/FDC  
MUX  
BUSY, SLCT, PE,  
nERROR, nACK  
DATA BUS  
SER_IRQ *  
PCI_CLK *  
SERIAL  
IRQ  
nSTB, nSLCTIN,  
nINIT, nALF  
ADDRESS BUS  
nIOR  
nIOW  
CONFIGURATION  
REGISTERS  
TXD1, nCTS1, nRTS1  
RXD1  
16C550  
COMPATIBLE  
SERIAL  
AEN  
PORT 1  
nDSR1, nDCD1, nRI1, nDTR1  
*
SA[0:12] (nCS)  
CONTROL BUS  
SA[13-15]*  
SD[O:7]  
IRR3/Mode  
*
HOST  
CPU  
16C550  
COMPATIBLE  
SERIAL  
PORT 2 WITH  
INFRARED  
*
IRRX, IRTX  
WDATA  
INTERFACE  
TXD2(IRTX), nCTS2, nRTS2 *  
WCLOCK  
DRQ[1:3]*  
*
RXD2(IRRX)  
SMSC  
PROPRIETARY  
82077  
COMPATIBLE  
VERTICAL  
FLOPPYDISK  
CONTROLLER  
DIGITAL  
DATA  
SEPARATOR  
WITH WRITE  
PRECOM-  
nDSR2, nDCD2, nRI2, nDTR2 *  
nDACK[1:3]*  
TC  
PENSATION  
*
IRQ[3:7,10:12]  
CORE  
KCLK  
KDATA  
RCLOCK  
RDATA  
RESET_DRV  
IOCHRDY  
8042  
MCLK  
MDATA  
GATEA20, KBDRST  
P12, P16 *  
CLOCK  
GEN  
*
Denotes Multifunction Pins  
nINDEX  
Vcc  
Vss  
DENSEL nDS0,1  
nTRK0  
nDSKCHG  
nWRPRT  
nWGATE  
nDIR nMTR0,1  
nRDATA  
DRVDEN0*  
nWDATA  
nSTEP  
DRVDEN1  
nHDSEL  
ICLOCK  
(14.318)  
FIGURE 1 - FDC37C67x BLOCK DIAGRAM  
11  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION  
SUPER I/O REGISTERS  
HOST PROCESSOR INTERFACE  
The address map, shown below in Table 1,  
shows the addresses of the different blocks of  
the Super I/O immediately after power up. The  
base addresses of the FDC, serial and parallel  
ports can be moved via the configuration  
registers. Some addresses are used to access  
more than one register.  
The host processor communicates with the  
FDC37C67x through a series of read/write  
registers. The port addresses for these registers  
are shown in Table 1. Register access is  
accomplished through programmed I/O or DMA  
transfers. All registers are 8 bits wide. All host  
interface output buffers are capable of sinking a  
minimum of 12 mA.  
Table 1 - Super I/O Block Addresses  
LOGICAL  
DEVICE  
ADDRESS  
Base+(0-5) and +(7)  
Base+(0-7)  
BLOCK NAME  
NOTES  
Floppy Disk  
0
4
5
Serial Port Com 1  
Serial Port Com 2  
Base1+(0-7)  
Base2+(0-7)  
IR Support  
Fast IR  
Parallel Port  
SPP  
3
Base+(0-3)  
Base+(0-7)  
EPP  
Base+(0-3), +(400-402)  
Base+(0-7), +(400-402)  
ECP  
ECP+EPP+SPP  
60, 64  
KYBD  
7
Note 1: Refer to the configuration register descriptions for setting the base address  
12  
FDC INTERNAL REGISTERS  
FLOPPY DISK CONTROLLER  
The Floppy Disk Controller contains eight  
internal registers which facilitate the interfacing  
between the host microprocessor and the disk  
drive. Table 2 shows the addresses required to  
access these registers. Registers other than the  
ones shown are not supported. The rest of the  
description assumes that the primary addresses  
have been selected.  
The Floppy Disk Controller (FDC) provides the  
interface between a host microprocessor and  
the floppy disk drives. The FDC integrates the  
functions of the Formatter/Controller, Digital  
Data Separator, Write Precompensation and  
Data Rate Selection logic for an IBM XT/AT  
compatible FDC. The true CMOS 765B core  
guarantees 100% IBM PC XT/AT compatibility  
in addition to providing data overflow and  
underflow protection.  
The FDC is compatible to the 82077AA using  
SMSC's proprietary floppy disk controller core.  
Table 2 - Status, Data and Control Registers  
(Shown with base addresses of 3F0 and 370)  
PRIMARY  
ADDRESS  
SECONDARY  
ADDRESS  
R/W  
REGISTER  
3F0  
3F1  
3F2  
3F3  
3F4  
3F4  
3F5  
3F6  
3F7  
3F7  
370  
371  
372  
373  
374  
374  
375  
376  
377  
377  
R
R
R/W  
R/W  
R
Status Register A (SRA)  
Status Register B (SRB)  
Digital Output Register (DOR)  
Tape Drive Register (TSR)  
Main Status Register (MSR)  
Data Rate Select Register (DSR)  
Data (FIFO)  
Reserved  
Digital Input Register (DIR)  
Configuration Control Register (CCR)  
W
R/W  
R
W
13  
interface pins in PS/2 and Model 30 modes. The  
SRA can be accessed at any time when in PS/2  
mode. In the PC/AT mode the data bus pins D0  
- D7 are held in a high impedance state for a  
read of address 3F0.  
STATUS REGISTER A (SRA)  
Address 3F0 READ ONLY  
This register is read-only and monitors the state  
of  
the  
FINTR pin and several disk  
PS/2 Mode  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
INT  
nDRV2 STEP nTRK0 HDSEL nINDX nWP  
DIR  
PENDING  
RESET  
0
N/A N/A N/A N/A  
0
0
0
COND.  
BIT 0 DIRECTION  
BIT 4 nTRACK 0  
Active high status indicating the direction of  
head movement. A logic "1" indicates inward  
direction; a logic "0" indicates outward direction.  
Active low status of the TRK0 disk interface  
input.  
BIT 5 STEP  
BIT 1 nWRITE PROTECT  
Active high status of the STEP output disk  
interface output pin.  
Active low status of the WRITE PROTECT disk  
interface input. A logic "0" indicates that the disk  
is write protected.  
BIT 6 nDRV2  
Active low status of the DRV2 disk interface  
input pin, indicating that a second drive has  
been installed.  
BIT 2 nINDEX  
Active low status of the INDEX disk interface  
input.  
BIT 7 INTERRUPT PENDING  
Active high bit indicating the state of the Floppy  
Disk Interrupt output.  
BIT 3 HEAD SELECT  
Active high status of the HDSEL disk interface  
input. A logic "1" selects side 1 and a logic "0"  
selects side 0.  
14  
PS/2 Model 30 Mode  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
INT  
PENDING  
DRQ STEP TRK0 nHDSEL INDX  
F/F  
WP  
nDIR  
RESET  
COND.  
0
0
0
N/A  
1
N/A  
N/A  
1
BIT 0 nDIRECTION  
BIT 4 TRACK 0  
Active low status indicating the direction of head  
movement. logic "0" indicates inward  
Active high status of the TRK0 disk interface  
input.  
A
direction; a logic "1" indicates outward direction.  
BIT 5 STEP  
BIT 1 WRITE PROTECT  
Active high status of the latched STEP disk  
interface output pin. This bit is latched with the  
STEP output going active, and is cleared with a  
read from the DIR register, or with a hardware  
or software reset.  
Active high status of the WRITE PROTECT disk  
interface input. A logic "1" indicates that the disk  
is write protected.  
BIT 2 INDEX  
Active high status of the INDEX disk interface  
input.  
BIT 6 DMA REQUEST  
Active high status of the DRQ output pin.  
BIT 3 nHEAD SELECT  
BIT 7 INTERRUPT PENDING  
Active high bit indicating the state of the Floppy  
Disk Interrupt output.  
Active low status of the HDSEL disk interface  
input. A logic "0" selects side 1 and a logic "1"  
selects side 0.  
15  
Model 30 modes. The SRB can be accessed at  
any time when in PS/2 mode. In the PC/AT  
mode the data bus pins D0 - D7 are held in a  
high impedance state for a read of address 3F1.  
STATUS REGISTER B (SRB)  
Address 3F1 READ ONLY  
This register is read-only and monitors the state  
of several disk interface pins in PS/2 and  
PS/2 Mode  
7
1
6
1
5
4
3
2
1
0
DRIVE WDATA RDATA WGATE MOT  
SEL0 TOGGLE TOGGLE  
MOT  
EN0  
EN1  
RESET  
COND.  
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
BIT 0 MOTOR ENABLE 0  
BIT 4 WRITE DATA TOGGLE  
Active high status of the MTR0 disk interface  
output pin. This bit is low after a hardware reset  
and unaffected by a software reset.  
Every inactive edge of the WDATA input causes  
this bit to change state.  
BIT 5 DRIVE SELECT 0  
BIT 1 MOTOR ENABLE 1  
Reflects the status of the Drive Select 0 bit of  
the DOR (address 3F2 bit 0). This bit is cleared  
after a hardware reset and it is unaffected by a  
software reset.  
Active high status of the MTR1 disk interface  
output pin. This bit is low after a hardware reset  
and unaffected by a software reset.  
BIT 2 WRITE GATE  
BIT 6 RESERVED  
Active high status of the WGATE disk interface  
output.  
Always read as a logic "1".  
BIT 7 RESERVED  
BIT 3 READ DATA TOGGLE  
Always read as a logic "1".  
Every inactive edge of the RDATA input causes  
this bit to change state.  
16  
PS/2 Model 30 Mode  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
nDRV2 nDS1 nDS0 WDATA RDATA WGATE nDS3 nDS2  
F/F  
F/F  
F/F  
RESET  
COND.  
N/A  
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
BIT 0 nDRIVE SELECT 2  
BIT 4 WRITE DATA  
Active low status of the DS2 disk interface  
output.  
Active high status of the latched WDATA output  
signal. This bit is latched by the inactive going  
edge of WDATA and is cleared by the read of  
the DIR register. This bit is not gated with  
WGATE.  
BIT 1 nDRIVE SELECT 3  
Active low status of the DS3 disk interface  
output.  
BIT 5 nDRIVE SELECT 0  
Active low status of the DS0 disk interface  
output.  
BIT 2 WRITE GATE  
Active high status of the latched WGATE output  
signal. This bit is latched by the active going  
edge of WGATE and is cleared by the read of  
the DIR register.  
BIT 6 nDRIVE SELECT 1  
Active low status of the DS1 disk interface  
output.  
BIT 3 READ DATA  
Active high status of the latched RDATA output  
signal. This bit is latched by the inactive going  
edge of RDATA and is cleared by the read of the  
DIR register.  
BIT 7 nDRV2  
Active low status of the DRV2 disk interface  
input.  
17  
DIGITAL OUTPUT REGISTER (DOR)  
also contains the enable for the DMA logic and a  
software reset bit. The contents of the DOR are  
unaffected by a software reset. The DOR can  
be written to at any time.  
Address 3F2 READ/WRITE  
The DOR controls the drive select and motor  
enables of the disk interface outputs. It  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MOT  
EN3  
MOT  
EN2  
MOT  
EN1  
MOT DMAEN nRESE DRIVE DRIVE  
EN0  
T
SEL1  
SEL0  
RESET  
COND.  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
BIT 0 and 1 DRIVE SELECT  
BIT 4 MOTOR ENABLE 0  
These two bits are binary encoded for the four  
drive selects DS0 -DS3, thereby allowing only  
one drive to be selected at one time.  
This bit controls the MTR0 disk interface output.  
A logic "1" in this bit will cause the output pin to  
go active.  
BIT 2 nRESET  
BIT 5 MOTOR ENABLE 1  
A logic "0" written to this bit resets the Floppy  
disk controller. This reset will remain active  
until a logic "1" is written to this bit. This  
software reset does not affect the DSR and CCR  
registers, nor does it affect the other bits of the  
DOR register. The minimum reset duration  
required is 100ns, therefore toggling this bit by  
consecutive writes to this register is a valid  
method of issuing a software reset.  
This bit controls the MTR1 disk interface output.  
A logic "1" in this bit will cause the output pin to  
go active.  
BIT 6 MOTOR ENABLE 2  
This bit controls the MTR2 disk interface output.  
A logic "1" in this bit will cause the output pin to  
go active.  
BIT 7 MOTOR ENABLE 3  
BIT 3 DMAEN  
PC/AT and Model 30 Mode:  
This bit controls the MTR3 disk interface output.  
A logic "1" in this bit causes the output to go  
active.  
Writing this bit to logic "1" will enable the DRQ,  
nDACK, TC and FINTR outputs. This bit being  
a logic "0" will disable the nDACK and TC  
inputs, and hold the DRQ and FINTR outputs in  
a high impedance state. This bit is a logic "0"  
after a reset and in these modes.  
Table 3 - Drive Activation Values  
DRIVE  
DOR VALUE  
0
1
2
3
1CH  
2DH  
4EH  
8FH  
PS/2 Mode: In this mode the DRQ, nDACK, TC  
and FINTR pins are always enabled. During a  
reset, the DRQ, nDACK, TC, and FINTR pins  
will remain enabled, but this bit will be cleared to  
a logic "0".  
18  
TAPE DRIVE REGISTER (TDR)  
Address 3F3 READ/WRITE  
Table 4 - Tape Select Bits  
The Tape Drive Register (TDR) is included for  
82077 software compatibility and allows the user  
to assign tape support to a particular drive  
during initialization. Any future references to  
that drive automatically invokes tape support.  
The TDR Tape Select bits TDR.[1:0] determine  
the tape drive number. Table 4 illustrates the  
Tape Select Bit encoding. Note that drive 0 is  
the boot device and cannot be assigned tape  
support. The remaining Tape Drive Register bits  
TDR.[7:2] are tristated when read. The TDR is  
unaffected by a software reset.  
TAPE SEL1  
TAPE SEL0  
(TDR.0)  
DRIVE  
SELECTED  
(TDR.1)  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
None  
1
2
3
Table 5 - Internal 2 Drive Decode - Normal  
DRIVE SELECT  
MOTOR ON OUTPUTS  
(ACTIVE LOW)  
DIGITAL OUTPUT REGISTER  
OUTPUTS (ACTIVE LOW)  
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit1 Bit 0  
nDS1  
nDS0  
nMTR1  
nBIT 5  
nBIT 5  
nBIT 5  
nBIT 5  
nBIT 5  
nMTR0  
nBIT 4  
nBIT 4  
nBIT 4  
nBIT 4  
nBIT 4  
X
X
X
1
X
X
1
X
1
1
X
X
X
0
0
0
1
1
X
0
1
0
1
X
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
X
X
0
X
0
0
Table 6 - Internal 2 Drive Decode - Drives 0 and 1 Swapped  
DRIVE SELECT OUTPUTS MOTOR ON OUTPUTS  
(ACTIVE LOW) (ACTIVE LOW)  
nDS1 nDS0  
DIGITAL OUTPUT REGISTER  
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit1 Bit 0  
nMTR1  
nMTR0  
nBIT 5  
nBIT 5  
nBIT 5  
nBIT 5  
nBIT 5  
X
X
X
1
X
X
1
X
1
1
X
X
X
0
0
0
1
1
X
0
1
0
1
X
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
nBIT 4  
nBIT 4  
nBIT 4  
nBIT 4  
nBIT 4  
X
X
0
X
0
0
19  
Normal Floppy Mode  
Normal mode. Register 3F3 contains only bits 0 and 1. When this register is read, bits 2 - 7 are a  
high impedance.  
DB7  
DB6  
DB5  
DB4  
DB3  
DB2  
DB1  
DB0  
REG 3F3 Tri-state Tri-state Tri-state Tri-state Tri-state Tri-state tape sel1 tape sel0  
Enhanced Floppy Mode 2 (OS2)  
Register 3F3 for Enhanced Floppy Mode 2 operation.  
DB7  
DB6  
DB5  
DB4  
DB3  
DB2  
DB1  
DB0  
REG 3F3  
Media  
ID1  
Media  
ID0  
Drive Type ID  
Floppy Boot Drive  
tape sel1 tape sel0  
For this mode, MEDIA_ID[1:0] pins are gated  
into bits 6 and 7 of the 3F3 register. These two  
bits are not affected by a hard or soft reset.  
Note: L0-CRF1-B5  
=
Logical Device 0,  
Configuration Register F1, Bit 5  
BITS 3 and 2 Floppy Boot Drive - These bits  
reflect the value of L0-CRF1. Bit 3 = L0-CRF1-  
B7. Bit 2 = L0-CRF1-B6.  
BIT 7 MEDIA ID 1 READ ONLY (Pin 19) (See  
Table 7)  
BIT 6 MEDIA ID 0 READ ONLY (Pin 20) (See  
Table 8)  
Bits  
1
and  
0
-
Tape Drive Select  
(READ/WRITE). Same as in Normal and  
Enhanced Floppy Mode 1.  
BITS 5 and 4 Drive Type ID - These bits reflect  
two of the bits of L0-CRF1. Which two bits  
these are depends on the last drive selected in  
the Digital Output Register (3F2). (See Table 9)  
Table 7 - Media ID1  
MEDIA ID1  
Table 8 - Media ID0  
MEDIA ID0  
INPUT  
BIT 7  
INPUT  
Pin 20  
BIT 6  
Pin 19  
L0-CRF1-B5 L0-CRF1-B5  
CRF1-B4  
= 0  
CRF1-B4  
= 1  
= 0  
= 1  
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
20  
Table 9 - Drive Type ID  
DIGITAL OUTPUT REGISTER REGISTER 3F3 - DRIVE TYPE ID  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
L0-CRF2 - B1  
L0-CRF2 - B3  
L0-CRF2 - B5  
L0-CRF2 - B7  
L0-CRF2 - B0  
L0-CRF2 - B2  
L0-CRF2 - B4  
L0-CRF2 - B6  
Note:  
L0-CRF2-Bx = Logical Device 0, Configuration Register F2, Bit x.  
21  
30 and Microchannel applications.  
Other  
DATA RATE SELECT REGISTER (DSR)  
applications can set the data rate in the DSR.  
The data rate of the floppy controller is the most  
recent write of either the DSR or CCR. The DSR  
is unaffected by a software reset. A hardware  
reset will set the DSR to 02H, which  
corresponds to the default precompensation  
setting and 250 Kbps.  
Address 3F4 WRITE ONLY  
This register is write only. It is used to program  
the data rate, amount of write precompensation,  
power down status, and software reset. The  
data  
rate  
is  
programmed  
using  
the  
Configuration Control Register (CCR) not the  
DSR,  
for  
PC/AT and PS/2 Model  
7
6
5
0
4
3
2
1
0
S/W POWER  
RESET DOWN  
PRE-  
PRE-  
PRE- DRATE DRATE  
COMP2 COMP1 COMP0 SEL1  
SEL0  
RESET  
COND.  
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
BIT 0 and 1 DATA RATE SELECT  
These bits control the data rate of the floppy  
controller. See Table 11 for the settings  
corresponding to the individual data rates. The  
data rate select bits are unaffected by a  
software reset, and are set to 250 Kbps after a  
hardware reset.  
BIT 7 SOFTWARE RESET  
This active high bit has the same function as the  
DOR RESET (DOR bit 2) except that this bit is  
self clearing.  
Note: The DSR is Shadowed in the Floppy Data  
Rate Select Shadow Register, LD8:CRC2[7:0].  
separator circuits will be turned off.  
controller will come out of manual low power  
The  
BIT  
2
through  
4
PRECOMPENSATION  
SELECT  
Table 10 - Precompensation Delays  
These three bits select the value of write  
precompensation that will be applied to the  
WDATA output signal. Table 10 shows the  
precompensation values for the combination of  
these bits settings. Track 0 is the default  
starting track number to start precompensation.  
this starting track number can be changed by  
the configure command.  
BIT 5 UNDEFINED  
Should be written as a logic "0".  
BIT 6 LOW POWER  
A logic "1" written to this bit will put the floppy  
controller into manual low power mode. The  
floppy controller clock and data mode after a  
software reset or access to the Data Register or  
Main Status Register.  
PRECOMP  
432  
PRECOMPENSATION  
DELAY (nsec)  
<2Mbps  
2Mbps*  
111  
001  
010  
011  
100  
101  
110  
000  
0.00  
41.67  
83.34  
125.00  
166.67  
208.33  
250.00  
Default  
0
20.8  
41.7  
62.5  
83.3  
104.2  
125  
Default  
Default: See Table 12  
*2Mbps data rate is only available if VCC = 5V.  
22  
Table 11 - Data Rates  
DATA RATE DATA RATE  
SEL1 SEL0  
DRIVE RATE  
DRATE(1)  
DENSEL  
DRT1  
DRT0  
MFM  
FM  
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1Meg  
500  
---  
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
250  
150  
125  
300  
250  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1Meg  
500  
---  
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
250  
250  
125  
500  
250  
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1Meg  
500  
---  
250  
---  
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
2Meg  
250  
125  
Drive Rate Table (Recommended) 00 = 360K, 1.2M, 720K, 1.44M and 2.88M Vertical Format  
01 = 3-Mode Drive  
10 = 2 Meg Tape  
Note 1: The DRATE and DENSEL values are mapped onto the DRVDEN pins.  
Table 12 - DRVDEN Mapping  
DRVDEN1  
DRVDEN0  
(1)  
DT1  
DT0  
DRIVE TYPE  
(1)  
0
0
DRATE0  
DENSEL  
4/2/1 MB 3.5"  
2/1 MB 5.25" FDDS  
2/1.6/1 MB 3.5" (3-MODE)  
1
0
1
0
1
1
DRATE0  
DRATE0  
DRATE1  
DRATE1  
nDENSEL  
DRATE0  
PS/2  
23  
Table 13 - Default Precompensation Delays  
PRECOMPENSATION  
DATA RATE  
DELAYS  
2 Mbps*  
1 Mbps  
500 Kbps  
300 Kbps  
250 Kbps  
20.8 ns  
41.67 ns  
125 ns  
125 ns  
125 ns  
*The 2Mbps data rate is only available if VCC = 5V.  
24  
time.  
The MSR indicates when the disk  
MAIN STATUS REGISTER  
controller is ready to receive data via the Data  
Register. It should be read before each byte  
transferring to or from the data register except in  
DMA mode. No delay is required when reading  
the MSR after a data transfer.  
Address 3F4 READ ONLY  
The Main Status Register is a read-only register  
and indicates the status of the disk controller.  
The Main Status Register can be read at any  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RQM  
DIO  
NON  
DMA  
CMD  
BUSY  
DRV3  
BUSY  
DRV2  
BUSY  
DRV1  
BUSY  
DRV0  
BUSY  
BIT 0 - 3 DRV x BUSY  
BIT 5 NON-DMA  
These bits are set to 1s when a drive is in the  
seek portion of a command, including implied  
and overlapped seeks and recalibrates.  
This mode is selected in the SPECIFY  
command and will be set to a 1 during the  
execution phase of a command. This is for  
polled data transfers and helps differentiate  
between the data transfer phase and the reading  
of result bytes.  
BIT 4 COMMAND BUSY  
This bit is set to a 1 when a command is in  
progress. This bit will go active after the  
command byte has been accepted and goes  
inactive at the end of the results phase. If there  
is no result phase (Seek, Recalibrate  
commands), this bit is returned to a 0 after the  
last command byte.  
BIT 6 DIO  
Indicates the direction of a data transfer once a  
RQM is set. A 1 indicates a read and a 0  
indicates a write is required.  
BIT 7 RQM  
Indicates that the host can transfer data if set to  
a 1. No access is permitted if set to a 0.  
25  
FIFO. The data is based upon the following  
formula:  
DATA REGISTER (FIFO)  
Address 3F5 READ/WRITE  
Threshold # x  
1
x 8  
- 1.5 ms = DELAY  
All command parameter information, disk data  
and result status are transferred between the  
host processor and the floppy disk controller  
through the Data Register.  
DATA RATE  
At the start of a command, the FIFO action is  
always disabled and command parameters  
must be sent based upon the RQM and DIO bit  
settings. As the command execution phase is  
entered, the FIFO is cleared of any data to  
ensure that invalid data is not transferred.  
Data transfers are governed by the RQM and  
DIO bits in the Main Status Register.  
The Data Register defaults to FIFO disabled  
mode after any form of reset. This maintains  
PC/AT hardware compatibility.  
The default  
An overrun or underrun will terminate the  
current command and the transfer of data. Disk  
writes will complete the current sector by  
generating a 00 pattern and valid CRC. Reads  
require the host to remove the remaining data  
so that the result phase may be entered.  
values can be changed through the Configure  
command (enable full FIFO operation with  
threshold control). The advantage of the FIFO  
is that it allows the system a larger DMA  
latency without causing a disk error. Table 14  
gives several examples of the delays with a  
Table 14 - FIFO Service Delay  
FIFO THRESHOLD  
EXAMPLES  
MAXIMUM DELAY TO SERVICING AT 2  
Mbps* DATA RATE  
1 byte  
2 bytes  
8 bytes  
15 bytes  
1 x 4 ms - 1.5 ms = 2.5 ms  
2 x 4 ms - 1.5 ms = 6.5 ms  
8 x 4 ms - 1.5 ms = 30.5 ms  
15 x 4 ms - 1.5 ms = 58.5 ms  
FIFO THRESHOLD  
EXAMPLES  
MAXIMUM DELAY TO SERVICING AT 1  
Mbps DATA RATE  
1 byte  
2 bytes  
8 bytes  
15 bytes  
1 x 8 ms - 1.5 ms = 6.5 ms  
2 x 8 ms - 1.5 ms = 14.5 ms  
8 x 8 ms - 1.5 ms = 62.5 ms  
15 x 8 ms - 1.5 ms = 118.5 ms  
FIFO THRESHOLD  
EXAMPLES  
MAXIMUM DELAY TO SERVICING AT  
500 Kbps DATA RATE  
1 byte  
2 bytes  
8 bytes  
15 bytes  
1 x 16 ms - 1.5 ms = 14.5 ms  
2 x 16 ms - 1.5 ms = 30.5 ms  
8 x 16 ms - 1.5 ms = 126.5 ms  
15 x 16 ms - 1.5 ms = 238.5 ms  
*The 2 Mbps data rate is only available if VCC = 5V.  
26  
DIGITAL INPUT REGISTER (DIR)  
Address 3F7 READ ONLY  
This register is read-only in all modes.  
PC-AT Mode  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DSK  
CHG  
RESET  
COND.  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
BIT 0 - 6 UNDEFINED  
BIT 7 DSKCHG  
The data bus outputs D0 - 6 will remain in a  
high impedance state during a read of this  
register.  
This bit monitors the pin of the same name and  
reflects the opposite value seen on the disk  
cable or the value programmed in the Force  
Disk Change Register (see Configuration  
Register LD8:CRC1[1:0]).  
PS/2 Mode  
7
6
1
5
1
4
1
3
1
2
1
0
DSK  
CHG  
DRATE DRATE nHIGH  
SEL1  
SEL0 nDENS  
RESET  
COND.  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
1
BIT 0 nHIGH DENS  
BITS 3 - 6 UNDEFINED  
This bit is low whenever the 500 Kbps or 1 Mbps  
data rates are selected, and high when 250  
Kbps and 300 Kbps are selected.  
Always read as a logic "1"  
BIT 7 DSKCHG  
This bit monitors the pin of the same name and  
reflects the opposite value seen on the disk  
cable or the value programmed in the Force  
Disk Change Register (see Configuration  
Register LD8:CRC1[1:0]).  
BITS 1 - 2 DATA RATE SELECT  
These bits control the data rate of the floppy  
controller.  
corresponding to the individual data rates. The  
data rate select bits are unaffected by  
See Table 11 for the settings  
a
software reset, and are set to 250 Kbps after a  
hardware reset.  
27  
Model 30 Mode  
7
DSK  
CHG  
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
2
1
0
DMAEN NOPREC DRATE DRATE  
SEL1  
SEL0  
RESET  
COND.  
N/A  
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
BITS 0 - 1 DATA RATE SELECT  
These bits control the data rate of the floppy  
controller. See Table 11 for the settings  
BIT 3 DMAEN  
This bit reflects the value of DMAEN bit set in  
the DOR register bit 3.  
corresponding to the individual data rates. The  
data rate select bits are unaffected by a  
software reset, and are set to 250 Kbps after a  
hardware reset.  
BITS 4 - 6 UNDEFINED  
Always read as a logic "0"  
BIT 7 DSKCHG  
BIT 2 NOPREC  
This bit reflects the value of NOPREC bit set in  
the CCR register.  
This bit monitors the pin of the same name and  
reflects the opposite value seen on the disk  
cable or the value programmed in the Force  
Disk Change Register (see Configuration  
Register LD8:CRC1[1:0]).  
28  
CONFIGURATION CONTROL REGISTER (CCR)  
Address 3F7 WRITE ONLY  
PC/AT and PS/2 Modes  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DRATE DRATE  
SEL1  
SEL0  
RESET  
COND.  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
1
0
BIT 0 and 1 DATA RATE SELECT 0 and 1  
These bits determine the data rate of the floppy  
controller. See Table 11 for the appropriate  
values.  
BIT 2 - 7 RESERVED  
Should be set to a logical "0"  
PS/2 Model 30 Mode  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NOPREC DRATE DRATE  
SEL1  
SEL0  
RESET  
COND.  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
1
0
BIT 0 and 1 DATA RATE SELECT 0 and 1  
These bits determine the data rate of the floppy  
controller. See Table 11 for the appropriate  
values.  
BIT 3 - 7 RESERVED  
Should be set to a logical "0"  
Table 12 shows the state of the DENSEL pin.  
The DENSEL pin is set high after a hardware  
reset and is unaffected by the DOR and the  
DSR resets.  
BIT 2 NO PRECOMPENSATION  
This bit can be set by software, but it has no  
functionality. It can be read by bit 2 of the DSR  
when in Model 30 register mode. Unaffected by  
software reset.  
29  
STATUS REGISTER ENCODING  
During the Result Phase of certain commands, the Data Register contains data bytes that give the  
status of the command just executed.  
Table 15 - Status Register 0  
BIT NO.  
SYMBOL  
IC  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
7,6  
Interrupt  
Code  
00 - Normal termination of command. The specified  
command was properly executed and completed  
without error.  
01 - Abnormal termination of command. Command  
execution was started, but was not successfully  
completed.  
10 - Invalid command. The requested command  
could not be executed.  
11 - Abnormal termination caused by Polling.  
5
4
SE  
EC  
Seek End  
The FDC completed a Seek, Relative Seek or  
Recalibrate command (used during a Sense Interrupt  
Command).  
Equipment  
Check  
The TRK0 pin failed to become a "1" after:  
1. 80 step pulses in the Recalibrate command.  
2. The Relative Seek command caused the FDC to  
step outward beyond Track 0.  
3
2
Unused. This bit is always "0".  
The current head address.  
H
Head  
Address  
1,0  
DS1,0  
Drive Select  
The current selected drive.  
30  
Table 16 - Status Register 1  
NAME  
End of  
BIT NO.  
SYMBOL  
EN  
DESCRIPTION  
7
The FDC tried to access a sector beyond the final  
sector of the track (255D). Will be set if TC is not  
issued after Read or Write Data command.  
Cylinder  
6
5
Unused. This bit is always "0".  
DE  
OR  
Data Error  
The FDC detected a CRC error in either the ID field or  
the data field of a sector.  
4
Overrun/  
Underrun  
Becomes set if the FDC does not receive CPU or DMA  
service within the required time interval, resulting in  
data overrun or underrun.  
3
2
Unused. This bit is always "0".  
ND  
No Data  
Any one of the following:  
1. Read Data, Read Deleted Data command - the  
FDC did not find the specified sector.  
2. Read ID command - the FDC cannot read the ID  
field without an error.  
3. Read A Track command - the FDC cannot find the  
proper sector sequence.  
1
0
NW  
MA  
Not Writable WP pin became a "1" while the FDC is executing a  
Write Data, Write Deleted Data, or Format A Track  
command.  
Missing  
Any one of the following:  
Address Mark 1. The FDC did not detect an ID address mark at the  
specified track after encountering the index pulse  
from the IDX pin twice.  
2. The FDC cannot detect a data address mark or a  
deleted data address mark on the specified track.  
31  
Table 17 - Status Register 2  
NAME  
BIT NO.  
SYMBOL  
DESCRIPTION  
Unused. This bit is always "0".  
Control Mark Any one of the following:  
1. Read Data command - the FDC encountered a  
7
6
CM  
deleted data address mark.  
2. Read Deleted Data command  
encountered a data address mark.  
-
the FDC  
5
4
DD  
Data Error in The FDC detected a CRC error in the data field.  
Data Field  
WC  
Wrong  
The track address from the sector ID field is different  
from the track address maintained inside the FDC.  
Cylinder  
3
2
1
Unused. This bit is always "0".  
Unused. This bit is always "0".  
BC  
Bad Cylinder The track address from the sector ID field is different  
from the track address maintained inside the FDC and  
is equal to FF hex, which indicates a bad track with a  
hard error according to the IBM soft-sectored format.  
0
MD  
Missing Data The FDC cannot detect a data address mark or a  
Address Mark deleted data address mark.  
32  
Table 18- Status Register 3  
NAME  
BIT NO.  
SYMBOL  
DESCRIPTION  
Unused. This bit is always "0".  
7
6
WP  
Write  
Indicates the status of the WP pin.  
Protected  
5
4
3
2
Unused. This bit is always "1".  
T0  
Track 0  
Indicates the status of the TRK0 pin.  
Unused. This bit is always "1".  
HD  
Head  
Indicates the status of the HDSEL pin.  
Address  
1,0  
DS1,0  
Drive Select  
Indicates the status of the DS1, DS0 pins.  
RESET  
DOR Reset vs. DSR Reset (Software Reset)  
There are three sources of system reset on the  
FDC: the RESET pin of the FDC, a reset  
generated via a bit in the DOR, and a reset  
generated via a bit in the DSR. At power on, a  
Power On Reset initializes the FDC. All resets  
take the FDC out of the power down state.  
These two resets are functionally the same.  
Both will reset the FDC core, which affects drive  
status information and the FIFO circuits. The  
DSR reset clears itself automatically while the  
DOR reset requires the host to manually clear it.  
DOR reset has precedence over the DSR reset.  
The DOR reset is set automatically upon a pin  
reset. The user must manually clear this reset  
bit in the DOR to exit the reset state.  
All operations are terminated upon a RESET,  
and the FDC enters an idle state. A reset while  
a disk write is in progress will corrupt the data  
and CRC.  
MODES OF OPERATION  
On exiting the reset state, various internal  
registers are cleared, including the Configure  
command information, and the FDC waits for a  
new command. Drive polling will start unless  
disabled by a new Configure command.  
The FDC has three modes of operation, PC/AT  
mode, PS/2 mode and Model 30 mode. These  
are determined by the state of the IDENT and  
MFM bits 6 and 5 respectively of CRxx.  
PC/AT mode - (IDENT high, MFM a "don't  
care")  
RESET Pin (Hardware Reset)  
The PC/AT register set is enabled, the DMA  
enable bit of the DOR becomes valid (FINTR  
and DRQ can be hi Z), and TC and DENSEL  
The RESET pin is a global reset and clears all  
registers except those programmed by the  
Specify command.  
The DOR reset bit is  
become active high signals.  
enabled and must be cleared by the host to exit  
the reset state.  
33  
Burst mode is enabled via Bit[1] of CRF0 in  
Logical Device 0. Setting Bit[1]=0 enables burst  
mode; the default is Bit[1]=1, for non-burst  
mode.  
PS/2 mode - (IDENT low, MFM high)  
This mode supports the PS/2 models 50/60/80  
configuration and register set. The DMA bit of  
the DOR becomes a "don't care", (FINTR and  
DRQ are always valid), TC and DENSEL  
become active low.  
CONTROLLER PHASES  
For simplicity, command handling in the FDC  
can be divided into three phases: Command,  
Execution, and Result. Each phase is described  
in the following sections.  
Model 30 mode - (IDENT low, MFM low)  
This mode supports PS/2 Model 30  
configuration and register set. The DMA enable  
bit of ther DOR becomes valid (FINTR and DRQ  
can be hi Z), TC is active high and DENSEL is  
active low.  
Command Phase  
After a reset, the FDC enters the command  
phase and is ready to accept a command from  
the host. For each of the commands, a defined  
set of command code bytes and parameter  
bytes has to be written to the FDC before the  
command phase is complete. (Please refer to  
Table 19 for the command set descriptions.)  
These bytes of data must be transferred in the  
order prescribed.  
DMA TRANSFERS  
DMA transfers are enabled with the Specify  
command and are initiated by the FDC by  
activating the FDRQ pin during a data transfer  
command. The FIFO is enabled directly by  
asserting nDACK and addresses need not be  
valid.  
Note that if the DMA controller (i.e. 8237A) is  
programmed to function in verify mode, a  
pseudo read is performed by the FDC based  
only on nDACK. This mode is only available  
when the FDC has been configured into byte  
mode (FIFO disabled) and is programmed to do  
a read. With the FIFO enabled, the FDC can  
perform the above operation by using the new  
Verify command; no DMA operation is needed.  
Before writing to the FDC, the host must  
examine the RQM and DIO bits of the Main  
Status Register. RQM and DIO must be equal  
to "1" and "0" respectively before command  
bytes may be written. RQM is set false by the  
FDC after each write cycle until the received  
byte is processed. The FDC asserts RQM again  
to request each parameter byte of the command  
unless an illegal command condition is  
detected.  
After the last parameter byte is  
The FDC37C67x supports two DMA transfer  
modes for the FDC: Single Transfer and Burst  
Transfer. In the case of the single transfer, the  
DMA Req goes active at the start of the DMA  
cycle, and the DMA Req is deasserted after the  
nDACK. In the case of the burst transfer, the  
Req is held active until the last transfer  
(independent of nDACK). See timing diagrams  
for more information.  
received, RQM remains "0" and the FDC  
automatically enters the next phase as defined  
by the command definition.  
The FIFO is disabled during the command  
phase to provide for the proper handling of the  
"Invalid Command" condition.  
34  
until the last byte is transferred out of the FIFO.  
The FDC will deactivate the FINT pin and RQM  
bit when the FIFO becomes empty.  
Execution Phase  
All data transfers to or from the FDC occur  
during the execution phase, which can proceed  
in DMA or non-DMA mode as indicated in the  
Specify command.  
Non-DMA Mode - Transfers from the Host to the  
FIFO  
The FINT pin and RQM bit in the Main Status  
Register are activated upon entering the  
execution phase of data transfer commands.  
The host must respond to the request by writing  
data into the FIFO. The FINT pin and RQM bit  
remain true until the FIFO becomes full. They  
are set true again when the FIFO has  
<threshold> bytes remaining in the FIFO. The  
FINT pin will also be deactivated if TC and  
nDACK both go inactive. The FDC enters the  
result phase after the last byte is taken by the  
FDC from the FIFO (i.e. FIFO empty condition).  
After a reset, the FIFO is disabled. Each data  
byte is transferred by an FINT or FDRQ  
depending on the DMA mode. The Configure  
command can enable the FIFO and set the  
FIFO threshold value.  
The following paragraphs detail the operation of  
the FIFO flow control. In these descriptions,  
<threshold> is defined as the number of bytes  
available to the FDC when service is requested  
from the host and ranges from 1 to 16. The  
parameter FIFOTHR, which the user programs,  
is one less and ranges from 0 to 15.  
DMA Mode - Transfers from the FIFO to the  
Host  
A low threshold value (i.e. 2) results in longer  
periods of time between service requests, but  
requires faster servicing of the request for both  
read and write cases. The host reads (writes)  
from (to) the FIFO until empty (full), then the  
transfer request goes inactive. The host must  
be very responsive to the service request. This  
is the desired case for use with a "fast" system.  
The FDC activates the DDRQ pin when the  
FIFO contains (16 - <threshold>) bytes, or the  
last byte of a full sector transfer has been  
placed in the FIFO. The DMA controller must  
respond to the request by reading data from the  
FIFO. The FDC will deactivate the DDRQ pin  
when the FIFO becomes empty. FDRQ goes  
inactive after nDACK goes active for the last  
byte of a data transfer (or on the active edge of  
nIOR, on the last byte, if no edge is present on  
nDACK). A data underrun may occur if FDRQ  
is not removed in time to prevent an unwanted  
cycle.  
A high value of threshold (i.e. 12) is used with a  
"sluggish" system by affording a long latency  
period after a service request, but results in  
more frequent service requests.  
Non-DMA Mode - Transfers from the FIFO to  
the Host  
DMA Mode - Transfers from the Host to the  
FIFO.  
The FINT pin and RQM bits in the Main Status  
Register are activated when the FIFO contains  
(16-<threshold>) bytes or the last bytes of a full  
sector have been placed in the FIFO. The FINT  
pin can be used for interrupt-driven systems,  
and RQM can be used for polled systems. The  
host must respond to the request by reading  
data from the FIFO. This process is repeated  
The FDC activates the FDRQ pin when entering  
the execution phase of the data transfer  
commands. The DMA controller must respond  
by activating the nDACK and nIOW pins and  
placing data in the FIFO. FDRQ remains active  
until the FIFO becomes full. FDRQ is again set  
35  
true when the FIFO has <threshold> bytes  
remaining in the FIFO. The FDC will also  
deactivate the FDRQ pin when TC becomes true  
(qualified by nDACK), indicating that no more  
data is required. FDRQ goes inactive after  
nDACK goes active for the last byte of a data  
transfer (or on the active edge of nIOW of the  
last byte, if no edge is present on nDACK). A  
data overrun may occur if FDRQ is not removed  
in time to prevent an unwanted cycle.  
status indications can be ignored if they were  
expected.  
Note that when the host is sending data to the  
FIFO of the FDC, the internal sector count will  
be complete when the FDC reads the last byte  
from its side of the FIFO. There may be a delay  
in the removal of the transfer request signal of  
up to the time taken for the FDC to read the last  
16 bytes from the FIFO. The host must tolerate  
this delay.  
Data Transfer Termination  
Result Phase  
The FDC supports terminal count explicitly  
through the TC pin and implicitly through the  
underrun/overrun and end-of-track (EOT)  
functions. For full sector transfers, the EOT  
parameter can define the last sector to be  
transferred in a single or multi-sector transfer.  
The generation of FINT determines the  
beginning of the result phase. For each of the  
commands, a defined set of result bytes has to  
be read from the FDC before the result phase is  
complete. These bytes of data must be read out  
for another command to start.  
If the last sector to be transferred is a partial  
sector, the host can stop transferring the data in  
mid-sector, and the FDC will continue to  
complete the sector as if a hardware TC was  
received. The only difference between these  
implicit functions and TC is that they return  
RQM and DIO must both equal "1" before the  
result bytes may be read. After all the result  
bytes have been read, the RQM and DIO bits  
switch to "1" and "0" respectively, and the CB bit  
is cleared, indicating that the FDC is ready to  
accept the next command.  
"abnormal termination" result status.  
Such  
36  
COMMAND SET/DESCRIPTIONS  
interrupt is issued. The user sends a Sense  
Interrupt Status command which returns an  
invalid command error. Refer to Table 19 for  
explanations of the various symbols used. Table  
20 lists the required parameters and the results  
associated with each command that the FDC is  
capable of performing.  
Commands can be written whenever the FDC is  
in the command phase. Each command has a  
unique set of needed parameters and status  
results. The FDC checks to see that the first  
byte is a valid command and, if valid, proceeds  
with the command. If it is invalid, an  
Table 19 - Description of Command Symbols  
NAME DESCRIPTION  
Cylinder Address The currently selected address; 0 to 255.  
Data Pattern The pattern to be written in each sector data field during  
SYMBOL  
C
D
formatting.  
D0, D1, D2, Drive Select 0-3  
D3  
Designates which drives are perpendicular drives on the  
Perpendicular Mode Command. A "1" indicates a perpendicular  
drive.  
DIR  
Direction Control If this bit is 0, then the head will step out from the spindle during a  
relative seek. If set to a 1, the head will step in toward the spindle.  
DS0, DS1  
Disk Drive Select  
DS1  
DS0  
DRIVE  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
drive 0  
drive 1  
drive 2  
drive 3  
DTL  
Special Sector  
Size  
By setting N to zero (00), DTL may be used to control the number  
of bytes transferred in disk read/write commands. The sector size  
(N = 0) is set to 128. If the actual sector (on the diskette) is larger  
than DTL, the remainder of the actual sector is read but is not  
passed to the host during read commands; during write  
commands, the remainder of the actual sector is written with all  
zero bytes. The CRC check code is calculated with the actual  
sector. When N is not zero, DTL has no meaning and should be  
set to FF HEX.  
EC  
Enable Count  
Enable FIFO  
When this bit is "1" the "DTL" parameter of the Verify command  
becomes SC (number of sectors per track).  
EFIFO  
This active low bit when a 0, enables the FIFO. A "1" disables the  
FIFO (default).  
37  
Table 19 - Description of Command Symbols  
NAME DESCRIPTION  
SYMBOL  
EIS  
Enable Implied  
Seek  
When set, a seek operation will be performed before executing any  
read or write command that requires the C parameter in the  
command phase. A "0" disables the implied seek.  
EOT  
GAP  
GPL  
End of Track  
The final sector number of the current track.  
Alters Gap 2 length when using Perpendicular Mode.  
Gap Length  
The Gap 3 size. (Gap 3 is the space between sectors excluding  
the VCO synchronization field).  
H/HDS  
HLT  
Head Address  
Selected head: 0 or 1 (disk side 0 or 1) as encoded in the sector  
ID field.  
Head Load Time The time interval that FDC waits after loading the head and before  
initializing a read or write operation. Refer to the Specify  
command for actual delays.  
HUT  
Head Unload  
Time  
The time interval from the end of the execution phase (of a read or  
write command) until the head is unloaded. Refer to the Specify  
command for actual delays.  
LOCK  
Lock defines whether EFIFO, FIFOTHR,  
and PRETRK  
parameters of the CONFIGURE COMMAND can be reset to their  
default values by a "software Reset". (A reset caused by writing to  
the appropriate bits of either tha DSR or DOR)  
MFM  
MT  
MFM/FM Mode  
Selector  
A one selects the double density (MFM) mode. A zero selects  
single density (FM) mode.  
Multi-Track  
Selector  
When set, this flag selects the multi-track operating mode. In this  
mode, the FDC treats a complete cylinder under head 0 and 1 as  
a single track. The FDC operates as this expanded track started  
at the first sector under head 0 and ended at the last sector under  
head 1. With this flag set, a multitrack read or write operation will  
automatically continue to the first sector under head 1 when the  
FDC finishes operating on the last sector under head 0.  
N
Sector Size Code This specifies the number of bytes in a sector. If this parameter is  
"00", then the sector size is 128 bytes. The number of bytes  
transferred is determined by the DTL parameter. Otherwise the  
sector size is (2 raised to the "N'th" power) times 128. All values  
up to "07" hex are allowable. "07"h would equal a sector size of  
16k. It is the user's responsibility to not select combinations that  
are not possible with the drive.  
38  
Table 19 - Description of Command Symbols  
DESCRIPTION  
SYMBOL  
NAME  
N
SECTOR SIZE  
00  
01  
02  
03  
..  
128 bytes  
256 bytes  
512 bytes  
1024 bytes  
...  
07  
16 Kbytes  
NCN  
New Cylinder  
Number  
The desired cylinder number.  
ND  
Non-DMA Mode  
Flag  
When set to 1, indicates that the FDC is to operate in the non-  
DMA mode. In this mode, the host is interrupted for each data  
transfer. When set to 0, the FDC operates in DMA mode,  
interfacing to a DMA controller by means of the DRQ and nDACK  
signals.  
OW  
Overwrite  
The bits D0-D3 of the Perpendicular Mode Command can only be  
modified if OW is set to 1. OW id defined in the Lock command.  
PCN  
Present Cylinder The current position of the head at the completion of Sense  
Number  
Interrupt Status command.  
POLL  
PRETRK  
Polling Disable  
When set, the internal polling routine is disabled. When clear,  
polling is enabled.  
Precompensation Programmable from track 00 to FFH.  
Start Track  
Number  
R
Sector Address  
The sector number to be read or written. In multi-sector transfers,  
this parameter specifies the sector number of the first sector to be  
read or written.  
RCN  
SC  
Relative Cylinder Relative cylinder offset from present cylinder as used by the  
Number  
Relative Seek command.  
Number of  
The number of sectors per track to be initialized by the Format  
Sectors Per Track command. The number of sectors per track to be verified during a  
Verify command when EC is set.  
SK  
Skip Flag  
When set to 1, sectors containing a deleted data address mark will  
automatically be skipped during the execution of Read Data. If  
Read Deleted is executed, only sectors with a deleted address  
mark will be accessed. When set to "0", the sector is read or  
written the same as the read and write commands.  
39  
Table 19 - Description of Command Symbols  
NAME DESCRIPTION  
SYMBOL  
SRT  
Step Rate Interval The time interval between step pulses issued by the FDC.  
Programmable from 0.5 to 8 milliseconds in increments of 0.5 ms  
at the 1 Mbit data rate. Refer to the SPECIFY command for actual  
delays.  
ST0  
ST1  
ST2  
ST3  
Status 0  
Status 1  
Status 2  
Status 3  
Registers within the FDC which store status information after a  
command has been executed. This status information is available  
to the host during the result phase after command execution.  
WGATE  
Write Gate  
Alters timing of WE to allow for pre-erase loads in perpendicular  
drives.  
40  
INSTRUCTION SET  
Table 20 - Instruction Set  
READ DATA  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7  
D6  
D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0  
Command  
W
W
W
MT MFM SK  
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
Command Codes  
0
0
0
HDS DS1 DS0  
C
Sector ID information prior to  
Command execution.  
W
W
W
W
W
W
H
R
N
EOT  
GPL  
DTL  
Execution  
Result  
Data transfer between the  
FDD and system.  
R
ST0  
Status information after  
Command execution.  
R
R
R
ST1  
ST2  
C
Sector ID information after  
Command execution.  
R
R
R
H
R
N
41  
READ DELETED DATA  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7  
D6  
D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0  
Command  
W
W
W
MT MFM SK  
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
Command Codes  
0
0
0
HDS DS1 DS0  
C
Sector ID information prior to  
Command execution.  
W
W
W
W
W
W
H
R
N
EOT  
GPL  
DTL  
Execution  
Result  
Data transfer between the  
FDD and system.  
R
ST0  
Status information after  
Command execution.  
R
R
R
ST1  
ST2  
C
Sector ID information after  
Command execution.  
R
R
R
H
R
N
42  
WRITE DATA  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7  
D6  
D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0  
Command  
W
W
W
MT MFM  
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
Command Codes  
0
0
HDS DS1 DS0  
C
Sector ID information prior to  
Command execution.  
W
W
W
W
W
W
H
R
N
EOT  
GPL  
DTL  
Execution  
Result  
Data transfer between the  
FDD and system.  
R
ST0  
Status information after  
Command execution.  
R
R
R
ST1  
ST2  
C
Sector ID information after  
Command execution.  
R
R
R
H
R
N
43  
WRITE DELETED DATA  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7  
D6  
D5 D4 D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Command  
W
W
W
MT MFM  
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
Command Codes  
0
0
HDS DS1 DS0  
C
Sector ID information  
prior to Command  
execution.  
W
W
W
W
W
W
H
R
N
EOT  
GPL  
DTL  
Execution  
Result  
Data transfer between  
the FDD and system.  
R
ST0  
Status information after  
Command execution.  
R
R
R
ST1  
ST2  
C
Sector ID information  
after Command  
execution.  
R
R
R
H
R
N
44  
READ A TRACK  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7  
0
D6  
MFM  
0
D5 D4 D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Command  
W
W
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
Command Codes  
0
HDS DS1 DS0  
C
Sector ID information  
prior to Command  
execution.  
W
W
W
W
W
W
H
R
N
EOT  
GPL  
DTL  
Execution  
Result  
Data transfer between  
the FDD and system.  
FDC reads all of  
cylinders' contents from  
index hole to EOT.  
R
ST0  
Status information after  
Command execution.  
R
R
R
ST1  
ST2  
C
Sector ID information  
after Command  
execution.  
R
R
R
H
R
N
45  
VERIFY  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7  
D6  
D5 D4 D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Command  
W
W
W
MT MFM SK  
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
Command Codes  
EC  
0
0
HDS DS1 DS0  
C
Sector ID information  
prior to Command  
execution.  
W
W
W
W
W
W
H
R
N
EOT  
GPL  
DTL/SC  
Execution  
Result  
No data transfer takes  
place.  
R
ST0  
Status information after  
Command execution.  
R
R
R
ST1  
ST2  
C
Sector ID information  
after Command  
execution.  
R
R
R
H
R
N
VERSION  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7  
0
D6  
0
D5 D4 D3  
D2  
0
D1  
0
D0  
0
Command  
Result  
W
R
0
0
1
1
0
0
Command Code  
1
0
0
0
0
Enhanced Controller  
46  
FORMAT A TRACK  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7  
0
D6  
MFM  
0
D5 D4 D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Command  
W
W
W
W
W
W
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
Command Codes  
0
HDS DS1 DS0  
N
Bytes/Sector  
Sectors/Cylinder  
Gap 3  
SC  
GPL  
D
Filler Byte  
Execution for  
Each Sector  
Repeat:  
W
C
Input Sector  
Parameters  
W
W
W
H
R
N
FDC formats an entire  
cylinder  
Result  
R
ST0  
Status information after  
Command execution  
R
R
R
R
R
R
ST1  
ST2  
Undefined  
Undefined  
Undefined  
Undefined  
47  
RECALIBRATE  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2  
D1  
D0  
Command  
W
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
Command Codes  
DS1 DS0  
Execution  
Head retracted to Track 0  
Interrupt.  
SENSE INTERRUPT STATUS  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0  
Command  
Result  
W
R
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Command Codes  
ST0  
Status information at the end  
of each seek operation.  
R
PCN  
SPECIFY  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0  
Command  
W
W
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
Command Codes  
SRT  
HUT  
HLT  
ND  
48  
SENSE DRIVE STATUS  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Command  
W
W
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Command Codes  
HDS DS1 DS0  
Result  
ST3  
Status information about  
FDD  
SEEK  
DATA BUS  
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Command  
W
W
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
Command Codes  
HDS DS1 DS0  
NCN  
Execution  
Head positioned over  
proper cylinder on  
diskette.  
CONFIGURE  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
Configure  
Information  
D7 D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Command  
W
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
W
W
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
EIS EFIFO POLL  
PRETRK  
FIFOTHR  
Execution  
49  
RELATIVE SEEK  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Command  
W
W
W
1
0
DIR  
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
HDS DS1 DS0  
RCN  
DUMPREG  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7  
D6  
0
D5  
D4  
D3 D2  
D1  
D0  
Command  
W
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
*Note:  
Registers  
placed in  
FIFO  
Execution  
Result  
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
PCN-Drive 0  
PCN-Drive 1  
PCN-Drive 2  
PCN-Drive 3  
SRT  
HUT  
HLT  
ND  
SC/EOT  
LOCK  
0
0
EIS EFIFO POLL  
PRETRK  
D3  
D2  
D1 D0  
GAP WGATE  
FIFOTHR  
50  
READ ID  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
Commands  
D7  
0
D6  
MFM  
0
D5 D4 D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Command  
W
W
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
HDS DS1 DS0  
Execution  
Result  
The first correct ID  
information on the  
Cylinder is stored in  
Data Register  
R
ST0  
Status information after  
Command execution.  
Disk status after the  
Command has  
completed  
R
R
R
R
R
R
ST1  
ST2  
C
H
R
N
51  
PERPENDICULAR MODE  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7  
0
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2  
D1  
D0  
Command  
W
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
Command Codes  
OW  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
GAP WGATE  
INVALID CODES  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0  
Command  
W
Invalid Codes  
Invalid Command Codes  
(NoOp - FDC goes into  
Standby State)  
Result  
R
ST0  
ST0 = 80H  
LOCK  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7  
LOCK  
0
D6 D5  
D4  
1
D3 D2 D1 D0  
Command  
Result  
W
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Command Codes  
LOCK  
SC is returned if the last command that was issued was the Format command. EOT is returned if the  
last command was a Read or Write.  
Note: These bits are used internally only. They are not reflected in the Drive Select pins. It is the  
user's responsibility to maintain correspondence between these bits and the Drive Select pins (DOR).  
52  
N determines the number of bytes per sector  
(see Table 21 below). If N is set to zero, the  
sector size is set to 128. The DTL value  
determines the number of bytes to be  
transferred. If DTL is less than 128, the FDC  
transfers the specified number of bytes to the  
host. For reads, it continues to read the entire  
128-byte sector and checks for CRC errors. For  
writes, it completes the 128-byte sector by filling  
in zeros. If N is not set to 00 Hex, DTL should  
be set to FF Hex and has no impact on the  
number of bytes transferred.  
DATA TRANSFER COMMANDS  
All of the Read Data, Write Data and Verify type  
commands use the same parameter bytes and  
return the same results information, the only  
difference being the coding of bits 0-4 in the first  
byte.  
An implied seek will be executed if the feature  
was enabled by the Configure command. This  
seek is completely transparent to the user. The  
Drive Busy bit for the drive will go active in the  
Main Status Register during the seek portion of  
the command. If the seek portion fails, it is  
reflected in the results status normally returned  
Table 21 - Sector Sizes  
N
SECTOR SIZE  
for  
a
Read/Write Data command. Status  
Register 0 (ST0) would contain the error code  
and C would contain the cylinder on which the  
seek failed.  
00  
01  
02  
03  
..  
128 bytes  
256 bytes  
512 bytes  
1024 bytes  
...  
Read Data  
07  
16 Kbytes  
A set of nine (9) bytes is required to place the  
FDC in the Read Data Mode. After the Read  
Data command has been issued, the FDC loads  
the head (if it is in the unloaded state), waits the  
specified head settling time (defined in the  
Specify command), and begins reading ID  
Address Marks and ID fields. When the sector  
address read off the diskette matches with the  
sector address specified in the command, the  
FDC reads the sector's data field and transfers  
the data to the FIFO.  
The amount of data which can be handled with  
a single command to the FDC depends upon  
MT (multi-track) and N (number of bytes/sector).  
The Multi-Track function (MT) allows the FDC to  
read data from both sides of the diskette. For a  
particular cylinder, data will be transferred  
starting at Sector 1, Side 0 and completing the  
last sector of the same track at Side 1.  
After completion of the read operation from the  
current sector, the sector address is  
incremented by one and the data from the next  
logical sector is read and output via the FIFO.  
This continuous read function is called "Multi-  
Sector Read Operation". Upon receipt of TC, or  
an implied TC (FIFO overrun/underrun), the  
FDC stops sending data but will continue to  
read data from the current sector, check the  
CRC bytes, and at the end of the sector,  
terminate the Read Data Command.  
If the host terminates a read or write operation  
in the FDC, the ID information in the result  
phase is dependent upon the state of the MT bit  
and EOT byte. Refer to Table 22.  
At the completion of the Read Data command,  
the head is not unloaded until after the Head  
Unload Time Interval (specified in the Specify  
command) has elapsed. If the host issues  
another command before the head unloads,  
53  
then the head settling time may be saved  
between subsequent reads.  
After reading the ID and Data Fields in each  
sector, the FDC checks the CRC bytes. If a  
CRC error occurs in the ID or data field, the  
FDC sets the IC code in Status Register 0 to  
"01" indicating abnormal termination, sets the  
DE bit flag in Status Register 1 to "1", sets the  
DD bit in Status Register 2 to "1" if CRC is  
incorrect in the ID field, and terminates the Read  
Data Command. Table 23 describes the effect  
of the SK bit on the Read Data command  
execution and results. Except where noted in  
Table 23, the C or R value of the sector address  
is automatically incremented (see Table 25).  
If the FDC detects a pulse on the nINDEX pin  
twice without finding the specified sector  
(meaning that the diskette's index hole passes  
through index detect logic in the drive twice), the  
FDC sets the IC code in Status Register 0 to  
"01" indicating abnormal termination, sets the  
ND bit in Status Register 1 to "1" indicating a  
sector not found, and terminates the Read Data  
Command.  
Table 22 - Effects of MT and N Bits  
MAXIMUM TRANSFER  
FINAL SECTOR READ  
FROM DISK  
MT  
N
CAPACITY  
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
256 x 26 = 6,656  
256 x 52 = 13,312  
512 x 15 = 7,680  
512 x 30 = 15,360  
1024 x 8 = 8,192  
1024 x 16 = 16,384  
26 at side 0 or 1  
26 at side 1  
15 at side 0 or 1  
15 at side 1  
8 at side 0 or 1  
16 at side 1  
Table 23 - Skip Bit vs Read Data Command  
DATA ADDRESS  
MARK TYPE  
ENCOUNTERED  
SK BIT  
VALUE  
RESULTS  
SECTOR CM BIT OF  
DESCRIPTION  
OF RESULTS  
READ?  
ST2 SET?  
0
0
Normal Data  
Deleted Data  
Yes  
No  
Normal  
termination.  
Address not  
incremented.  
Next sector not  
searched for.  
Normal  
Yes  
Yes  
1
1
Normal Data  
Deleted Data  
Yes  
No  
No  
termination.  
Normal  
Yes  
termination.  
Sector not read  
("skipped").  
54  
Table 24 describes the effect of the SK bit on  
the Read Deleted Data command execution and  
results.  
Read Deleted Data  
This command is the same as the Read Data  
command, only it operates on sectors that  
contain a Deleted Data Address Mark at the  
beginning of a Data Field.  
Except where noted in Table 24, the C or R  
value of the sector address is automatically  
incremented (see Table 25).  
Table 24 - Skip Bit vs. Read Deleted Data Command  
DATA ADDRESS  
MARK TYPE  
ENCOUNTERED  
SK BIT  
VALUE  
RESULTS  
SECTOR CM BIT OF  
DESCRIPTION  
OF RESULTS  
READ?  
ST2 SET?  
0
Normal Data  
Yes  
Yes  
Address not  
incremented.  
Next sector not  
searched for.  
Normal  
0
1
Deleted Data  
Normal Data  
Yes  
No  
No  
termination.  
Normal  
Yes  
termination.  
Sector not read  
("skipped").  
Normal  
1
Deleted Data  
Yes  
No  
termination.  
the ND flag of Status Register 1 to a "1" if there  
is no comparison. Multi-track or skip operations  
are not allowed with this command. The MT and  
SK bits (bits D7 and D5 of the first command  
byte respectively) should always be set to "0".  
Read A Track  
This command is similar to the Read Data  
command except that the entire data field is  
read continuously from each of the sectors of a  
track. Immediately after encountering a pulse  
on the nINDEX pin, the FDC starts to read all  
data fields on the track as continuous blocks of  
data without regard to logical sector numbers. If  
the FDC finds an error in the ID or DATA CRC  
check bytes, it continues to read data from the  
track and sets the appropriate error bits at the  
end of the command. The FDC compares the  
ID information read from each sector with the  
specified value in the command and sets  
This command terminates when the EOT  
specified number of sectors has not been read.  
If the FDC does not find an ID Address Mark on  
the diskette after the second occurrence of a  
pulse on the IDX pin, then it sets the IC code in  
Status Register  
0
to "01" (abnormal  
termination), sets the MA bit in Status Register  
1 to "1", and terminates the command.  
55  
Table 25 - Result Phase Table  
FINAL SECTOR  
ID INFORMATION AT RESULT PHASE  
MT  
HEAD  
TRANSFERRED TO  
HOST  
C
H
R
N
0
0
Less than EOT  
Equal to EOT  
Less than EOT  
Equal to EOT  
Less than EOT  
Equal to EOT  
Less than EOT  
Equal to EOT  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
LSB  
NC  
LSB  
R + 1  
01  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
C + 1  
NC  
1
0
1
R + 1  
01  
C + 1  
NC  
1
R + 1  
01  
NC  
NC  
R + 1  
01  
C + 1  
NC: No Change, the same value as the one at the beginning of command execution.  
LSB: Least Significant Bit, the LSB of H is complemented.  
0 to "01" (abnormal termination), sets the DE bit  
of Status Register 1 to "1", and terminates the  
Write Data command.  
Write Data  
After the Write Data command has been issued,  
the FDC loads the head (if it is in the unloaded  
state), waits the specified head load time if  
unloaded (defined in the Specify command),  
and begins reading ID fields. When the sector  
address read from the diskette matches the  
sector address specified in the command, the  
FDC reads the data from the host via the FIFO  
and writes it to the sector's data field.  
The Write Data command operates in much the  
same manner as the Read Data command. The  
following items are the same. Please refer to the  
Read Data Command for details:  
·
·
·
·
·
Transfer Capacity  
EN (End of Cylinder) bit  
ND (No Data) bit  
Head Load, Unload Time Interval  
ID information when the host terminates the  
command  
After writing data into the current sector, the  
FDC computes the CRC value and writes it into  
the CRC field at the end of the sector transfer.  
The Sector Number stored in "R" is incremented  
by one, and the FDC continues writing to the  
next data field. The FDC continues this "Multi-  
Sector Write Operation". Upon receipt of a  
terminal count signal or if a FIFO over/under run  
occurs while a data field is being written, then  
the remainder of the data field is filled with  
zeros. The FDC reads the ID field of each  
sector and checks the CRC bytes. If it detects  
a CRC error in ne of the ID fields, it sets the  
·
Definition of DTL when N = 0 and when N  
does not = 0  
Write Deleted Data  
This command is almost the same as the Write  
Data command except that a Deleted Data  
Address Mark is written at the beginning of the  
Data Field instead of the normal Data Address  
Mark. This command is typically used to mark  
a bad sector containing an error on the floppy  
disk.  
IC  
code  
in  
Status  
Register  
56  
verify 256 sectors). This command can also be  
terminated by setting the EC bit to "0" and the  
EOT value equal to the final sector to be  
checked. If EC is set to "0", DTL/SC should be  
programmed to 0FFH. Refer to Table 25 and  
Table 26 for information concerning the values  
of MT and EC versus SC and EOT value.  
Verify  
The Verify command is used to verify the data  
stored on a disk. This command acts exactly  
like a Read Data command except that no data  
is transferred to the host. Data is read from the  
disk and CRC is computed and checked against  
the previously-stored value.  
Definitions:  
Because data is not transferred to the host, TC  
(pin 89) cannot be used to terminate this  
command. By setting the EC bit to "1", an  
implicit TC will be issued to the FDC. This  
implicit TC will occur when the SC value has  
decremented to 0 (an SC value of 0 will  
# Sectors Per Side = Number of formatted  
sectors per each side of the disk.  
# Sectors Remaining = Number of formatted  
sectors left which can be read, including side 1  
of the disk if MT is set to "1".  
Table 26 - Verify Command Result Phase Table  
MT  
EC  
SC/EOT VALUE  
TERMINATION RESULT  
0
0
SC = DTL  
EOT £ # Sectors Per Side  
Success Termination  
Result Phase Valid  
0
0
0
1
SC = DTL  
EOT > # Sectors Per Side  
Unsuccessful Termination  
Result Phase Invalid  
Successful Termination  
Result Phase Valid  
SC £ # Sectors Remaining AND  
EOT £ # Sectors Per Side  
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
SC > # Sectors Remaining OR  
EOT > # Sectors Per Side  
Unsuccessful Termination  
Result Phase Invalid  
SC = DTL  
EOT £ # Sectors Per Side  
Successful Termination  
Result Phase Valid  
SC = DTL  
EOT > # Sectors Per Side  
Unsuccessful Termination  
Result Phase Invalid  
Successful Termination  
Result Phase Valid  
SC £ # Sectors Remaining AND  
EOT £ # Sectors Per Side  
1
1
SC > # Sectors Remaining OR  
EOT > # Sectors Per Side  
Unsuccessful Termination  
Result Phase Invalid  
Note: If MT is set to "1" and the SC value is greater than the number of remaining formatted sectors  
on Side 0, verifying will continue on Side 1 of the disk.  
57  
After formatting each sector, the host must send  
new values for C, H, R and N to the FDC for the  
next sector on the track. The R value (sector  
number) is the only value that must be changed  
by the host after each sector is formatted. This  
allows the disk to be formatted with  
nonsequential sector addresses (interleaving).  
This incrementing and formatting continues for  
the whole track until the FDC encounters a pulse  
on the IDX pin again and it terminates the  
command.  
Format A Track  
The Format command allows an entire track to  
be formatted. After a pulse from the IDX pin is  
detected, the FDC starts writing data on the disk  
including gaps, address marks, ID fields, and  
data fields per the IBM System 34 or 3740  
format (MFM or FM respectively). The particular  
values that will be written to the gap and data  
field are controlled by the values programmed  
into N, SC, GPL, and D which are specified by  
the host during the command phase. The data  
field of the sector is filled with the data byte  
specified by D. The ID field for each sector is  
supplied by the host; that is, four data bytes per  
sector are needed by the FDC for C, H, R, and  
N (cylinder, head, sector number and sector size  
respectively).  
Table 27 contains typical values for gap fields  
which are dependent upon the size of the sector  
and the number of sectors on each track.  
Actual values can vary due to drive electronics.  
FORMAT FIELDS  
SYSTEM 34 (DOUBLE DENSITY) FORMAT  
DATA  
GAP4a SYNC  
IAM  
GAP1 SYNC IDAM  
C
Y
L
H
D
S
E
C
N
O
C
R
C
GAP2 SYNC  
AM  
C
R
C
80x  
4E  
12x  
00  
50x  
4E  
12x  
00  
22x  
4E  
12x  
00  
DATA  
DATA  
DATA  
GAP3 GAP 4b  
GAP3 GAP 4b  
GAP3 GAP 4b  
3x FC  
C2  
3x FE  
A1  
3x FB  
A1 F8  
SYSTEM 3740 (SINGLE DENSITY) FORMAT  
DATA  
AM  
GAP4a SYNC  
IAM  
FC  
GAP1 SYNC IDAM  
C
Y
L
H
D
S
E
C
N
O
C
R
C
GAP2 SYNC  
C
R
C
40x  
FF  
6x  
00  
26x  
FF  
6x  
00  
11x  
FF  
6x  
00  
FE  
FB or  
F8  
PERPENDICULAR FORMAT  
DATA  
AM  
GAP4a SYNC  
IAM  
GAP1 SYNC IDAM  
C
Y
L
H
D
S
E
C
N
O
C
R
C
GAP2 SYNC  
C
R
C
80x  
4E  
12x  
00  
50x  
4E  
12x  
00  
41x  
4E  
12x  
00  
3x FC  
C2  
3x FE  
A1  
3x FB  
A1 F8  
58  
Table 27 - Typical Values for Formatting  
FORMAT SECTOR SIZE  
N
SC  
GPL1  
GPL2  
128  
128  
512  
1024  
2048  
4096  
...  
00  
00  
02  
03  
04  
05  
...  
12  
10  
08  
04  
02  
01  
07  
10  
18  
46  
C8  
C8  
09  
19  
30  
87  
FF  
FF  
FM  
5.25"  
Drives  
256  
256  
01  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
...  
12  
10  
09  
04  
02  
01  
0A  
20  
2A  
80  
C8  
C8  
0C  
32  
50  
F0  
FF  
FF  
512*  
1024  
2048  
4096  
...  
MFM  
128  
256  
512  
0
1
2
0F  
09  
05  
07  
0F  
1B  
1B  
2A  
3A  
FM  
3.5"  
Drives  
256  
512**  
1024  
1
2
3
0F  
09  
05  
0E  
1B  
35  
36  
54  
74  
MFM  
GPL1 = suggested GPL values in Read and Write commands to avoid splice point  
between data field and ID field of contiguous sections.  
GPL2 = suggested GPL value in Format A Track command.  
*PC/AT values (typical)  
**PS/2 values (typical). Applies with 1.0 MB and 2.0 MB drives.  
NOTE: All values except sector size are in hex.  
59  
command to return the head back to physical  
Track 0.  
CONTROL COMMANDS  
Control commands differ from the other  
commands in that no data transfer takes place.  
Three commands generate an interrupt when  
complete: Read ID, Recalibrate, and Seek. The  
other control commands do not generate an  
interrupt.  
The Recalibrate command does not have a  
result phase.  
The Sense Interrupt Status  
command must be issued after the Recalibrate  
command to effectively terminate it and to  
provide verification of the head position (PCN).  
During the command phase of the recalibrate  
operation, the FDC is in the BUSY state, but  
during the execution phase it is in a NON-BUSY  
Read ID  
state.  
At this time, another Recalibrate  
The Read ID command is used to find the  
present position of the recording heads. The  
FDC stores the values from the first ID field it is  
able to read into its registers. If the FDC does  
not find an ID address mark on the diskette after  
the second occurrence of a pulse on the  
nINDEX pin, it then sets the IC code in Status  
Register 0 to "01" (abnormal termination), sets  
the MA bit in Status Register 1 to "1", and  
terminates the command.  
command may be issued, and in this manner  
parallel Recalibrate operations may be done on  
up to four drives at once.  
Upon power up, the software must issue a  
Recalibrate command to properly initialize all  
drives and the controller.  
Seek  
The read/write head within the drive is moved  
from track to track under the control of the Seek  
command. The FDC compares the PCN, which  
is the current head position, with the NCN and  
performs the following operation if there is a  
difference:  
The following commands will generate an  
interrupt upon completion. They do not return  
any result bytes. It is highly recommended that  
control commands be followed by the Sense  
Interrupt Status command. Otherwise, valuable  
interrupt status information will be lost.  
PCN < NCN: Direction signal to drive set to  
"1" (step in) and issues step pulses.  
Recalibrate  
PCN > NCN: Direction signal to drive set to  
"0" (step out) and issues step pulses.  
This command causes the read/write head  
within the FDC to retract to the track 0 position.  
The FDC clears the contents of the PCN  
counter and checks the status of the nTR0 pin  
from the FDD. As long as the nTR0 pin is low,  
the DIR pin remains 0 and step pulses are  
issued. When the nTR0 pin goes high, the SE  
bit in Status Register 0 is set to "1" and the  
command is terminated. If the nTR0 pin is still  
low after 79 step pulses have been issued, the  
FDC sets the SE and the EC bits of Status  
Register 0 to "1" and terminates the command.  
Disks capable of handling more than 80 tracks  
per side may require more than one Recalibrate  
The rate at which step pulses are issued is  
controlled by SRT (Stepping Rate Time) in the  
Specify command. After each step pulse is  
issued, NCN is compared against PCN, and  
when NCN = PCN the SE bit in Status Register  
0 is set to "1" and the command is terminated.  
During the command phase of the seek or  
recalibrate operation, the FDC is in the BUSY  
state, but during the execution phase it is in the  
NON-BUSY state. At this time, another Seek or  
Recalibrate command may be issued, and in  
60  
this manner, parallel seek operations may be  
done on up to four drives at once.  
d. Read Deleted Data command  
e. Write Data command  
f. Format A Track command  
g. Write Deleted Data command  
h. Verify command  
Note that if implied seek is not enabled, the read  
and write commands should be preceded by:  
1) Seek command - Step to the proper track  
2) Sense Interrupt Status command  
Terminate the Seek command  
2. End of Seek, Relative Seek, or Recalibrate  
command  
-
3) Read ID - Verify head is on proper track  
4) Issue Read/Write command.  
3. FDC requires a data transfer during the  
execution phase in the non-DMA mode  
The Seek command does not have a result  
phase. Therefore, it is highly recommended that  
the Sense Interrupt Status command be issued  
after the Seek command to terminate it and to  
provide verification of the head position (PCN).  
The H bit (Head Address) in ST0 will always  
return to a "0". When exiting POWERDOWN  
mode, the FDC clears the PCN value and the  
status information to zero. Prior to issuing the  
POWERDOWN command, it is highly  
recommended that the user service all pending  
interrupts through the Sense Interrupt Status  
command.  
The Sense Interrupt Status command resets the  
interrupt signal and, via the IC code and SE bit  
of Status Register 0, identifies the cause of the  
interrupt.  
Table 28 - Interrupt Identification  
SE  
IC  
INTERRUPT DUE TO  
0
1
11  
00  
Polling  
Normal termination of Seek  
or Recalibrate command  
Abnormal termination of  
Seek or Recalibrate  
command  
1
01  
Sense Interrupt Status  
The Seek, Relative Seek, and Recalibrate  
commands have no result phase. The Sense  
Interrupt Status command must be issued  
immediately after these commands to terminate  
them and to provide verification of the head  
position (PCN). The H (Head Address) bit in  
ST0 will always return a "0". If a Sense Interrupt  
Status is not issued, the drive will continue to be  
BUSY and may affect the operation of the next  
command.  
An interrupt signal on FINT pin is generated by  
the FDC for one of the following reasons:  
1. Upon entering the Result Phase of:  
a. Read Data command  
b. Read A Track command  
c. Read ID command  
61  
end of the execution phase of one of the  
read/write commands to the head unload state.  
The SRT (Step Rate Time) defines the time  
interval between adjacent step pulses. Note that  
the spacing between the first and second step  
pulses may be shorter than the remaining step  
pulses. The HLT (Head Load Time) defines the  
time between when the Head Load signal goes  
high and the read/write operation starts. The  
values change with the data rate speed  
selection and are documented in Table 29. The  
values are the same for MFM and FM.  
Sense Drive Status  
Sense Drive Status obtains drive status  
information. It has not execution phase and  
goes directly to the result phase from the  
command phase. Status Register 3 contains  
the drive status information.  
Specify  
The Specify command sets the initial values for  
each of the three internal times. The HUT  
(Head Unload Time) defines the time from the  
Table 29 - Drive Control Delays (ms)  
HUT  
SRT  
2M  
1M  
500K 300K 250K  
2M  
1M  
500K 300K 250K  
0
1
..  
E
F
64  
4
..  
56  
60  
128  
8
..  
112  
120  
256  
16  
..  
224  
240  
426  
26.7  
..  
373  
400  
512  
32  
..  
448  
480  
4
3.75  
..  
0.5  
0.25  
8
7.5  
..  
1
0.5  
16  
15  
..  
2
1
26.7  
25  
..  
3.33  
1.67  
32  
30  
..  
4
2
HLT  
2M  
1M  
500K  
300K  
250K  
00  
01  
02  
..  
64  
0.5  
1
128  
1
2
256  
2
4
426  
3.3  
6.7  
..  
512  
4
8
..  
..  
..  
.
7F  
7F  
63  
63.5  
126  
127  
252  
254  
420  
423  
504  
508  
The choice of DMA or non-DMA operations is  
made by the ND bit. When this bit is "1", the  
non-DMA mode is selected, and when ND is "0",  
the DMA mode is selected. In DMA mode, data  
transfers are signalled by the FDRQ pin. Non-  
DMA mode uses the RQM bit and the FINT pin  
to signal data transfers.  
Configure  
The Configure command is issued to select the  
special features of the FDC. A Configure  
command need not be issued if the default  
values of the FDC meet the system  
requirements.  
62  
Configure Default Values:  
Relative Seek  
EIS - No Implied Seeks  
EFIFO - FIFO Disabled  
POLL - Polling Enabled  
The command is coded the same as for Seek,  
except for the MSB of the first byte and the DIR  
bit.  
FIFOTHR - FIFO Threshold Set to 1 Byte  
PRETRK - Pre-Compensation Set to Track 0  
DIR  
Head Step Direction Control  
EIS - Enable Implied Seek. When set to "1", the  
FDC will perform a Seek operation before  
executing a read or write command. Defaults to  
no implied seek.  
DIR  
ACTION  
0
1
Step Head Out  
Step Head In  
EFIFO - A "1" disables the FIFO (default). This  
means data transfers are asked for on a byte-  
by-byte basis. Defaults to "1", FIFO disabled.  
The threshold defaults to "1".  
RCN Relative  
Cylinder  
Number  
that  
determines how many tracks to step the  
head in or out from the current track  
number.  
POLL - Disable polling of the drives. Defaults to  
"0", polling enabled. When enabled, a single  
interrupt is generated after a reset. No polling is  
performed while the drive head is loaded and  
the head unload delay has not expired.  
The Relative Seek command differs from the  
Seek command in that it steps the head the  
absolute number of tracks specified in the  
command instead of making a comparison  
against an internal register.  
The Seek  
FIFOTHR - The FIFO threshold in the execution  
phase of read or write commands. This is  
programmable from 1 to 16 bytes. Defaults to  
one byte. A "00" selects one byte; "0F" selects  
16 bytes.  
command is good for drives that support a  
maximum of 256 tracks. Relative Seeks cannot  
be overlapped with other Relative Seeks. Only  
one Relative Seek can be active at a time.  
Relative Seeks may be overlapped with Seeks  
and Recalibrates. Bit 4 of Status Register 0  
(EC) will be set if Relative Seek attempts to step  
outward beyond Track 0.  
PRETRK  
-
Pre-Compensation Start Track  
Number. Programmable from track 0 to 255.  
Defaults to track 0. A "00" selects track 0; "FF"  
selects track 255.  
As an example, assume that a floppy drive has  
300 useable tracks. The host needs to read  
track 300 and the head is on any track (0-255).  
If a Seek command is issued, the head will stop  
at track 255. If a Relative Seek command is  
issued, the FDC will move the head the  
specified number of tracks, regardless of the  
internal cylinder position register (but will  
increment the register). If the head was on track  
40 (d), the maximum track that the FDC could  
position the head on using Relative Seek will be  
295 (D), the initial track + 255 (D). The  
maximum count that the head can be moved  
Version  
The Version command checks to see if the  
controller is an enhanced type or the older type  
(765A). A value of 90 H is returned as the result  
byte.  
63  
with a single Relative Seek command is 255  
(D).  
Perpendicular Mode  
The Perpendicular Mode command should be  
issued prior to executing Read/Write/Format  
The internal register, PCN, will overflow as the  
cylinder number crosses track 255 and will  
contain 39 (D). The resulting PCN value is thus  
(RCN + PCN) mod 256. Functionally, the FDC  
starts counting from 0 again as the track  
number goes above 255 (D). It is the user's  
responsibility to compensate FDC functions  
commands that access  
a disk drive with  
perpendicular recording capability. With this  
command, the length of the Gap2 field and VCO  
enable timing can be altered to accommodate  
the unique requirements of these drives. Table  
30 describes the effects of the WGATE and  
GAP bits for the Perpendicular Mode command.  
Upon a reset, the FDC will default to the  
conventional mode (WGATE = 0, GAP = 0).  
(precompensation  
track  
number)  
when  
accessing tracks greater than 255. The FDC  
does not keep track that it is working in an  
"extended track area" (greater than 255). Any  
command issued will use the current PCN value  
except for the Recalibrate command, which only  
looks for the TRACK0 signal. Recalibrate will  
return an error if the head is farther than 79 due  
to its limitation of issuing a maximum of 80 step  
pulses. The user simply needs to issue a second  
Recalibrate command. The Seek command and  
implied seeks will function correctly within the  
44 (D) track (299-255) area of the "extended  
track area". It is the user's responsibility not to  
issue a new track position that will exceed the  
maximum track that is present in the extended  
area.  
Selection of the 500 Kbps and  
1 Mbps  
perpendicular modes is independent of the  
actual data rate selected in the Data Rate Select  
Register. The user must ensure that these two  
data rates remain consistent.  
The Gap2 and VCO timing requirements for  
perpendicular recording type drives are dictated  
by the design of the read/write head. In the  
design of this head, a pre-erase head precedes  
the normal read/write head by a distance of 200  
micrometers. This works out to about 38 bytes  
at a 1 Mbps recording density. Whenever the  
write head is enabled by the Write Gate signal,  
the pre-erase head is also activated at the same  
time. Thus, when the write head is initially  
turned on, flux transitions recorded on the media  
for the first 38 bytes will not be preconditioned  
with the pre-erase head since it has not yet been  
activated. To accommodate this head activation  
and deactivation time, the Gap2 field is  
expanded to a length of 41 bytes. The format  
field shown on Page 57 illustrates the change in  
the Gap2 field size for the perpendicular format.  
To return to the standard floppy range (0-255) of  
tracks, a Relative Seek should be issued to  
cross the track 255 boundary.  
A Relative Seek can be used instead of the  
normal Seek, but the host is required to  
calculate the difference between the current  
head location and the new (target) head  
location. This may require the host to issue a  
Read ID command to ensure that the head is  
physically on the track that software assumes it  
to be. Different FDC commands will return  
different cylinder results which may be difficult  
to keep track of with software without the Read  
ID command.  
64  
On the read back by the FDC, the controller  
must begin synchronization at the beginning of  
the sync field. For the conventional mode, the  
internal PLL VCO is enabled (VCOEN)  
approximately 24 bytes from the start of the  
Gap2 field. But, when the controller operates in  
the 1 Mbps perpendicular mode (WGATE = 1,  
GAP = 1), VCOEN goes active after 43 bytes to  
accommodate the increased Gap2 field size.  
For both cases, and approximate two-byte  
cushion is maintained from the beginning of the  
sync field for the purposes of avoiding write  
splices in the presence of motor speed variation.  
designated Perpendicular recording drives. This  
enhancement allows data transfers between  
Conventional and Perpendicular drives without  
having to issue Perpendicular mode commnds  
between the accesses of the different drive  
types, nor having to change write pre-  
compensation values.  
When both GAP and WGATE bits of the  
PERPENDICULAR MODE COMMAND are both  
programmed to "0" (Conventional mode), then  
D0, D1, D2, D3, and D4 can be programmed  
independently to "1" for that drive to be set  
automatically to Perpendicular mode. In this  
mode the following set of conditions also apply:  
1. The GAP2 written to a perpendicular drive  
during a write operation will depend upon the  
programmed data rate.  
2. The write pre-compensation given to a  
perpendicular mode drive will be 0ns.  
3. For D0-D3 programmed to "0" for  
conventional mode drives any data written  
will be at the currently programmed write  
pre-compensation.  
For the Write Data case, the FDC activates  
Write Gate at the beginning of the sync field  
under the conventional mode. The controller  
then writes a new sync field, data address mark,  
data field, and CRC as shown on page 57. With  
the pre-erase head of the perpendicular drive,  
the write head must be activated in the Gap2  
field to insure a proper write of the new sync  
field. For the 1 Mbps perpendicular mode  
(WGATE = 1, GAP = 1), 38 bytes will be written  
in the Gap2 space. Since the bit density is  
proportional to the data rate, 19 bytes will be  
written in the Gap2 field for the 500 Kbps  
perpendicular mode (WGATE = 1, GAP =0).  
Note: Bits D0-D3 can only be overwritten when  
OW is programmed as a "1".If either  
GAP or WGATE is a "1" then D0-D3 are  
ignored.  
It should be noted that none of the alterations in  
Gap2 size, VCO timing, or Write Gate timing  
affect normal program flow. The information  
provided here is just for background purposes  
and is not needed for normal operation. Once  
the Perpendicular Mode command is invoked,  
FDC software behavior from the user standpoint  
is unchanged.  
Software and hardware resets have the  
following effect on the PERPENDICULAR  
MODE COMMAND:  
1. "Software" resets (via the DOR or DSR  
registers) will only clear GAP and WGATE  
bits to "0". D0-D3 are unaffected and retain  
their previous value.  
2. "Hardware" resets will clear all bits  
(GAP, WGATE and D0-D3) to "0", i.e all  
conventional mode.  
The perpendicular mode command is enhanced  
to  
allow  
specific  
drives  
to  
be  
65  
Table 30 - Effects of WGATE and GAP Bits  
PORTION OF  
GAP 2  
LENGTH OF  
WRITTEN BY  
GAP2 FORMAT WRITE DATA  
WGATE GAP  
MODE  
FIELD  
OPERATION  
0
0
0
1
Conventional  
Perpendicular  
(500 Kbps)  
Reserved  
(Conventional)  
Perpendicular  
(1 Mbps)  
22 Bytes  
22 Bytes  
0 Bytes  
19 Bytes  
1
1
0
1
22 Bytes  
41 Bytes  
0 Bytes  
38 Bytes  
LOCK  
ENHANCED DUMPREG  
In order to protect systems with long DMA  
latencies against older application software that  
can disable the FIFO the LOCK Command has  
been added. This command should only be  
used by the FDC routines, and application  
software should refrain from using it. If an  
application calls for the FIFO to be disabled  
then the CONFIGURE command should be  
used.  
The DUMPREG command is designed to  
support system run-time diagnostics and  
application software development and debug.  
To accommodate the LOCK command and the  
enhanced PERPENDICULAR MODE command  
the eighth byte of the DUMPREG command has  
been modified to contain the additional data  
from these two commands.  
COMPATIBILITY  
The LOCK command defines whether the  
EFIFO, FIFOTHR, and PRETRK parameters of  
the CONFIGURE command can be RESET by  
the DOR and DSR registers. When the LOCK  
bit is set to logic "1" all subsequent "software  
RESETS by the DOR and DSR registers will not  
change the previously set parameters to their  
default values. All "hardware" RESET from the  
RESET pin will set the LOCK bit to logic "0" and  
return the EFIFO, FIFOTHR, and PRETRK to  
their default values. A status byte is returned  
immediately after issuing a a LOCK command.  
This byte reflects the value of the LOCK bit set  
by the command byte.  
The FDC37C67x was designed with software  
compatibility in mind. It is a fully backwards-  
compatible solution with the older generation  
765A/B disk controllers. The FDC also  
implements on-board registers for compatibility  
with the PS/2, as well as PC/AT and PC/XT,  
floppy disk controller subsystems. After  
a
hardware reset of the FDC, all registers,  
functions and enhancements default to a PC/AT,  
PS/2 or PS/2 Model 30 compatible operating  
mode, depending on how the IDENT and MFM  
bits are configured by the system BIOS.  
66  
SERIAL PORT (UART)  
The FDC37C67x incorporates two full function  
UARTs. They are compatible with the  
NS16450, the 16450 ACE registers and the  
NS16550A. The UARTS perform serial-to-  
parallel conversion on received characters and  
parallel-to-serial conversion on transmit  
characters. The data rates are independently  
programmable from 460.8K baud down to 50  
baud. The character options are programmable  
for 1 start; 1, 1.5 or 2 stop bits; even, odd, sticky  
or no parity; and prioritized interrupts. The  
UARTs each contain a programmable baud rate  
generator that is capable of dividing the input  
clock or crystal by a number from 1 to 65535.  
The UARTs are also capable of supporting the  
MIDI data rate. Refer to the Configuration  
Registers for information on disabling, power  
down and changing the base address of the  
UARTs. The interrupt from a UART is enabled  
by programming OUT2 of that UART to a logic  
"1". OUT2 being a logic "0" disables that  
UART's interrupt. The second UART also  
supports IrDA, HP-SIR, ASK-IR, Fast IR and  
Consumer IR infrared modes of operation.  
Note: The UARTs may be configured to share  
an interrupt. Refer to the Configuration section  
for more information.  
REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
Addressing of the accessible registers of the  
Serial Port is shown below.  
The base  
addresses of the serial ports are defined by the  
configuration registers (see Configuration  
section). The Serial Port registers are located at  
sequentially increasing addresses above these  
base addresses. The FDC37C67x contains two  
serial ports, each of which contain a register set  
as described below.  
Table 31 - Addressing the Serial Port  
DLAB*  
A2  
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
A1  
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
A0  
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
REGISTER NAME  
Receive Buffer (read)  
0
0
Transmit Buffer (write)  
Interrupt Enable (read/write)  
Interrupt Identification (read)  
FIFO Control (write)  
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
Line Control (read/write)  
Modem Control (read/write)  
Line Status (read/write)  
Modem Status (read/write)  
Scratchpad (read/write)  
Divisor LSB (read/write)  
Divisor MSB (read/write  
1
*Note: DLAB is Bit 7 of the Line Control Register  
67  
The following section describes the operation of  
the registers.  
Bit 0  
This bit enables the Received Data Available  
Interrupt (and timeout interrupts in the FIFO  
mode) when set to logic "1".  
RECEIVE BUFFER REGISTER (RB)  
Address Offset = 0H, DLAB = 0, READ ONLY  
Bit 1  
This bit enables the Transmitter Holding  
Register Empty Interrupt when set to logic "1".  
Bit 2  
This bit enables the Received Line Status  
Interrupt when set to logic "1". The error  
sources causing the interrupt are Overrun,  
Parity, Framing and Break. The Line Status  
Register must be read to determine the source.  
Bit 3  
This register holds the received incoming data  
byte. Bit 0 is the least significant bit, which is  
transmitted and received first. Received data is  
double buffered; this uses an additional shift  
register to receive the serial data stream and  
convert it to a parallel 8 bit word which is  
transferred to the Receive Buffer register. The  
shift register is not accessible.  
This bit enables the MODEM Status Interrupt  
when set to logic "1". This is caused when one  
of the Modem Status Register bits changes  
state.  
Bits 4 through 7  
These bits are always logic "0".  
TRANSMIT BUFFER REGISTER (TB)  
Address Offset = 0H, DLAB = 0, WRITE ONLY  
This register contains the data byte to be  
transmitted.  
The transmit buffer is double  
buffered, utilizing an additional shift register (not  
accessible) to convert the 8 bit data word to a  
serial format. This shift register is loaded from  
the Transmit Buffer when the transmission of  
the previous byte is complete.  
FIFO CONTROL REGISTER (FCR)  
Address Offset = 2H, DLAB = X, WRITE  
This is a write only register at the same location  
as the IIR. This register is used to enable and  
clear the FIFOs, set the RCVR FIFO trigger  
level. Note: DMA is not supported. The UART1  
and UART2 FCR’s are shadowed in the UART1  
FIFO Control Shadow Register (LD8:CRC3[7:0])  
and UART2 FIFO Control Shadow Register  
(LD8:CRC4[7:0]).  
INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER (IER)  
Address Offset = 1H, DLAB = 0, READ/WRITE  
The lower four bits of this register control the  
enables of the five interrupt sources of the Serial  
Port interrupt. It is possible to totally disable the  
interrupt system by resetting bits 0 through 3 of  
this register. Similarly, setting the appropriate  
bits of this register to a high, selected interrupts  
can be enabled. Disabling the interrupt system  
inhibits the Interrupt Identification Register and  
disables any Serial Port interrupt out of the  
FDC37C67x. All other system functions operate  
in their normal manner, including the Line  
Status and MODEM Status Registers. The  
contents of the Interrupt Enable Register are  
described below.  
Bit 0  
Setting this bit to a logic "1" enables both the  
XMIT and RCVR FIFOs. Clearing this bit to a  
logic "0" disables both the XMIT and RCVR  
FIFOs and clears all bytes from both FIFOs.  
When changing from FIFO Mode to non-FIFO  
(16450) mode, data is automatically cleared  
from the FIFOs. This bit must be a 1 when  
other bits in this register are written to or they  
will not be properly programmed.  
68  
3. Transmitter Holding Register Empty  
4. MODEM Status (lowest priority)  
Bit 1  
Setting this bit to a logic "1" clears all bytes in  
the RCVR FIFO and resets its counter logic to 0.  
The shift register is not cleared. This bit is self-  
clearing.  
Information indicating that a prioritized interrupt  
is pending and the source of that interrupt is  
stored in the Interrupt Identification Register  
(refer to Interrupt Control Table). When the CPU  
accesses the IIR, the Serial Port freezes all  
interrupts and indicates the highest priority  
pending interrupt to the CPU. During this CPU  
access, even if the Serial Port records new  
interrupts, the current indication does not  
change until access is completed. The contents  
of the IIR are described below.  
Bit 2  
Setting this bit to a logic "1" clears all bytes in  
the XMIT FIFO and resets its counter logic to 0.  
The shift register is not cleared. This bit is self-  
clearing.  
Bit 3  
Writting to this bit has no effect on the operation  
of the UART. The RXRDY and TXRDY pins are  
not available on this chip.  
Bit 4,5  
Bit 0  
This bit can be used in either a hardwired  
prioritized or polled environment to indicate  
whether an interrupt is pending. When bit 0 is a  
logic "0", an interrupt is pending and the  
contents of the IIR may be used as a pointer to  
the appropriate internal service routine. When  
bit 0 is a logic "1", no interrupt is pending.  
Reserved  
Bit 6,7  
These bits are used to set the trigger level for  
the RCVR FIFO interrupt.  
Bit 7 Bit 6  
RCVR FIFO  
Trigger Level  
(BYTES)  
Bits 1 and 2  
These two bits of the IIR are used to identify the  
highest priority interrupt pending as indicated by  
the Interrupt Control Table.  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
4
8
Bit 3  
14  
In non-FIFO mode, this bit is a logic "0". In  
FIFO mode this bit is set along with bit 2 when a  
timeout interrupt is pending.  
INTERRUPT IDENTIFICATION REGISTER (IIR)  
Address Offset = 2H, DLAB = X, READ  
Bits 4 and 5  
These bits of the IIR are always logic "0".  
By accessing this register, the host CPU can  
determine the highest priority interrupt and its  
source. Four levels of priority interrupt exist.  
They are in descending order of priority:  
Bits 6 and 7  
These two bits are set when the FIFO  
CONTROL Register bit 0 equals 1.  
1. Receiver Line Status (highest priority)  
2. Received Data Ready  
69  
Table 32 - Interrupt Control Table  
FIFO  
INTERRUPT  
MODE IDENTIFICATION  
ONLY  
REGISTER  
BIT BIT BIT PRIORITY  
INTERRUPT SET AND RESET FUNCTIONS  
BIT  
3
INTERRUPT  
TYPE  
INTERRUPT  
SOURCE  
INTERRUPT  
RESET CONTROL  
2
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
LEVEL  
0
0
-
None  
None  
-
Highest  
Receiver Line  
Status  
Overrun Error,  
Parity Error,  
Reading the Line  
Status Register  
Framing Error or  
Break Interrupt  
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
Second  
Second  
Received Data  
Available  
Receiver Data  
Available  
Read Receiver  
Buffer or the FIFO  
drops below the  
trigger level.  
Character  
Timeout  
Indication  
No Characters  
Have Been  
Removed From  
or Input to the  
RCVR FIFO  
Reading the  
Receiver Buffer  
Register  
during the last 4  
Char times and  
there is at least 1  
char in it during  
this time  
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Third  
Transmitter  
Transmitter  
Reading the IIR  
Holding Register Holding Register Register (if Source  
Empty  
Empty  
of Interrupt) or  
Writing the  
Transmitter Holding  
Register  
Fourth  
MODEM Status  
Clear to Send or Reading the  
Data Set Ready MODEM Status  
or Ring Indicator Register  
or Data Carrier  
Detect  
70  
odd number of 1s when the data word bits and  
the parity bit are summed).  
LINE CONTROL REGISTER (LCR)  
Address Offset = 3H, DLAB = 0, READ/WRITE  
Bit 4  
This register contains the format information of  
the serial line. The bit definitions are:  
Bits 0 and 1  
Even Parity Select bit. When bit 3 is a logic "1"  
and bit 4 is a logic "0", an odd number of logic  
"1"'s is transmitted or checked in the data word  
bits and the parity bit. When bit 3 is a logic "1"  
and bit 4 is a logic "1" an even number of bits is  
transmitted and checked.  
These two bits specify the number of bits in  
each transmitted or received serial character.  
The encoding of bits 0 and 1 is as follows:  
Bit 5  
Stick Parity bit. When bit 3 is a logic "1" and bit  
5 is a logic "1", the parity bit is transmitted and  
then detected by the receiver in the opposite  
state indicated by bit 4.  
BIT 1 BIT 0 WORD LENGTH  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
5 Bits  
6 Bits  
7 Bits  
8 Bits  
Bit 6  
Set Break Control bit. When bit 6 is a logic "1",  
the transmit data output (TXD) is forced to the  
Spacing or logic "0" state and remains there  
(until reset by a low level bit 6) regardless of  
other transmitter activity. This feature enables  
The Start, Stop and Parity bits are not included  
in the word length.  
Bit 2  
the Serial Port to alert  
communications system.  
Bit 7  
a terminal in a  
This bit specifies the number of stop bits in each  
transmitted or received serial character. The  
following table summarizes the information.  
Divisor Latch Access bit (DLAB). It must be set  
high (logic "1") to access the Divisor Latches of  
the Baud Rate Generator during read or write  
operations. It must be set low (logic "0") to  
access the Receiver Buffer Register, the  
Transmitter Holding Register, or the Interrupt  
Enable Register.  
NUMBER OF  
BIT 2 WORD LENGTH  
STOP BITS  
0
1
1
1
1
--  
1
1.5  
2
5 bits  
6 bits  
7 bits  
8 bits  
MODEM CONTROL REGISTER (MCR)  
Address Offset = 4H, DLAB = X, READ/WRITE  
This 8 bit register controls the interface with the  
MODEM or data set (or device emulating a  
MODEM). The contents of the MODEM control  
register are described below.  
2
2
Note: The receiver will ignore all stop bits  
beyond the first, regardless of the number used  
in transmitting.  
Bit 0  
This bit controls the Data Terminal Ready  
(nDTR) output. When bit 0 is set to a logic "1",  
the nDTR output is forced to a logic "0". When  
bit 0 is a logic "0", the nDTR output is forced to  
a logic "1".  
Bit 3  
Parity Enable bit. When bit 3 is a logic "1", a  
parity bit is generated (transmit data) or  
checked (receive data) between the last data  
word bit and the first stop bit of the serial data.  
(The parity bit is used to generate an even or  
71  
operational but the interrupts' sources are now  
the lower four bits of the MODEM Control  
Register instead of the MODEM Control inputs.  
The interrupts are still controlled by the Interrupt  
Enable Register.  
Bit 1  
This bit controls the Request To Send (nRTS)  
output. Bit 1 affects the nRTS output in a  
manner identical to that described above for bit  
0.  
Bits 5 through 7  
Bit 2  
These bits are permanently set to logic zero.  
This bit controls the Output 1 (OUT1) bit. This  
bit does not have an output pin and can only be  
read or written by the CPU.  
LINE STATUS REGISTER (LSR)  
Address Offset = 5H, DLAB = X, READ/WRITE  
Bit 3  
Output 2 (OUT2). This bit is used to enable an  
UART interrupt. When OUT2 is a logic "0", the  
serial port interrupt output is forced to a high  
impedance state - disabled. When OUT2 is a  
logic "1", the serial port interrupt outputs are  
enabled.  
Bit 0  
Data Ready (DR). It is set to a logic "1"  
whenever a complete incoming character has  
been received and transferred into the Receiver  
Buffer Register or the FIFO. Bit 0 is reset to a  
logic "0" by reading all of the data in the Receive  
Buffer Register or the FIFO.  
Bit 4  
This bit provides the loopback feature for  
diagnostic testing of the Serial Port. When bit 4  
is set to logic "1", the following occur:  
Bit 1  
Overrun Error (OE). Bit 1 indicates that data in  
the Receiver Buffer Register was not read before  
the next character was transferred into the  
register, thereby destroying the previous  
character. In FIFO mode, an overrunn error will  
occur only when the FIFO is full and the next  
character has been completely received in the  
shift register, the character in the shift register is  
overwritten but not transferred to the FIFO. The  
OE indicator is set to a logic "1" immediately  
upon detection of an overrun condition, and  
reset whenever the Line Status Register is read.  
Bit 2  
Parity Error (PE). Bit 2 indicates that the  
received data character does not have the  
correct even or odd parity, as selected by the  
even parity select bit. The PE is set to a logic  
"1" upon detection of a parity error and is  
reset to a logic "0" whenever the Line Status  
Register is read. In the FIFO mode this error is  
associated with the particular character in the  
FIFO it applies to. This error is indicated when  
the associated character is at the top of the  
FIFO.  
1. The TXD is set to the Marking State(logic  
"1").  
2. The receiver Serial Input (RXD) is  
disconnected.  
3. The output of the Transmitter Shift  
Register is "looped back" into the Receiver  
Shift Register input.  
4. All MODEM Control inputs (nCTS, nDSR,  
nRI and nDCD) are disconnected.  
5. The four MODEM Control outputs (nDTR,  
nRTS, OUT1 and OUT2) are internally  
connected to the four MODEM Control  
inputs (nDSR, nCTS, RI, DCD).  
6. The Modem Control output pins are forced  
inactive high.  
7. Data that is transmitted is immediately  
received.  
This feature allows the processor to verify the  
transmit and receive data paths of the Serial  
Port. In the diagnostic mode, the receiver and  
the transmitter interrupts are fully operational.  
The MODEM Control Interrupts are also  
72  
transferred from the Transmitter Holding  
Register into the Transmitter Shift Register. The  
bit is reset to logic "0" whenever the CPU loads  
the Transmitter Holding Register. In the FIFO  
mode this bit is set when the XMIT FIFO is  
empty, it is cleared when at least 1 byte is  
written to the XMIT FIFO. Bit 5 is a read only  
bit.  
Bit 3  
Framing Error (FE). Bit 3 indicates that the  
received character did not have a valid stop bit.  
Bit 3 is set to a logic "1" whenever the stop bit  
following the last data bit or parity bit is detected  
as a zero bit (Spacing level). The FE is reset to  
a logic "0" whenever the Line Status Register is  
read. In the FIFO mode this error is associated  
with the particular character in the FIFO it  
applies to. This error is indicated when the  
associated character is at the top of the FIFO.  
The Serial Port will try to resynchronize after a  
framing error. To do this, it assumes that the  
framing error was due to the next start bit, so it  
samples this 'start' bit twice and then takes in  
the 'data'.  
Bit 6  
Transmitter Empty (TEMT). Bit 6 is set to a  
logic "1" whenever the Transmitter Holding  
Register (THR) and Transmitter Shift Register  
(TSR) are both empty. It is reset to logic "0"  
whenever either the THR or TSR contains a data  
character. Bit 6 is a read only bit. In the FIFO  
mode this bit is set whenever the THR and TSR  
are both empty,  
Bit 4  
Break Interrupt (BI). Bit 4 is set to a logic "1"  
whenever the received data input is held in the  
Spacing state (logic "0") for longer than a full  
word transmission time (that is, the total time of  
the start bit + data bits + parity bits + stop bits).  
The BI is reset after the CPU reads the contents  
of the Line Status Register. In the FIFO mode  
this error is associated with the particular  
character in the FIFO it applies to. This error is  
indicated when the associated character is at  
the top of the FIFO. When break occurs only  
one zero character is loaded into the FIFO.  
Restarting after a break is received, requires the  
serial data (RXD) to be logic "1" for at least 1/2  
bit time.  
Bit 7  
This bit is permanently set to logic "0" in the 450  
mode. In the FIFO mode, this bit is set to a  
logic "1" when there is at least one parity error,  
framing error or break indication in the FIFO.  
This bit is cleared when the LSR is read if there  
are no subsequent errors in the FIFO.  
MODEM STATUS REGISTER (MSR)  
Address Offset = 6H, DLAB = X, READ/WRITE  
This 8 bit register provides the current state of  
the control lines from the MODEM (or peripheral  
device).  
information, four bits of the MODEM Status  
Register (MSR) provide change information.  
These bits are set to logic "1" whenever a  
control input from the MODEM changes state.  
They are reset to logic "0" whenever the  
MODEM Status Register is read.  
In addition to this current state  
Note: Bits 1 through 4 are the error conditions  
that produce a Receiver Line Status Interrupt  
whenever any of the corresponding conditions  
are detected and the interrupt is enabled.  
Bit 5  
Bit 0  
Delta Clear To Send (DCTS). Bit 0 indicates  
that the nCTS input to the chip has changed  
state since the last time the MSR was read.  
Bit 1  
Delta Data Set Ready (DDSR). Bit 1 indicates  
that the nDSR input has changed state since the  
last time the MSR was read.  
Transmitter Holding Register Empty (THRE).  
Bit 5 indicates that the Serial Port is ready to  
accept a new character for transmission. In  
addition, this bit causes the Serial Port to issue  
an interrupt when the Transmitter Holding  
Register interrupt enable is set high. The THRE  
bit is set to a logic "1" when a character is  
73  
Bit 2  
SCRATCHPAD REGISTER (SCR)  
Trailing Edge of Ring Indicator (TERI). Bit 2  
indicates that the nRI input has changed from  
logic "0" to logic "1".  
Address Offset =7H, DLAB =X, READ/WRITE  
This 8 bit read/write register has no effect on the  
operation of the Serial Port. It is intended as a  
scratchpad register to be used by the  
programmer to hold data temporarily.  
Bit 3  
Delta Data Carrier Detect (DDCD).  
Bit 3  
indicates that the nDCD input to the chip has  
changed state.  
PROGRAMMABLE BAUD RATE GENERATOR  
(AND DIVISOR LATCHES DLH, DLL)  
Note: Whenever bit 0, 1, 2, or 3 is set to a logic  
"1", a MODEM Status Interrupt is generated.  
Bit 4  
This bit is the complement of the Clear To Send  
(nCTS) input. If bit 4 of the MCR is set to logic  
"1", this bit is equivalent to nRTS in the MCR.  
Bit 5  
This bit is the complement of the Data Set  
Ready (nDSR) input. If bit 4 of the MCR is set  
to logic "1", this bit is equivalent to DTR in the  
MCR.  
The Serial Port contains a programmable Baud  
Rate Generator that is capable of taking any  
clock input (DC to 3 MHz) and dividing it by any  
divisor from 1 to 65535. This output frequency  
of the Baud Rate Generator is 16x the Baud  
rate. Two 8 bit latches store the divisor in 16 bit  
binary format. These Divisor Latches must be  
loaded during initialization in order to insure  
desired operation of the Baud Rate Generator.  
Upon loading either of the Divisor Latches, a 16  
bit Baud counter is immediately loaded. This  
prevents long counts on initial load. If a 0 is  
loaded into the BRG registers the output divides  
the clock by the number 3. If a 1 is loaded the  
output is the inverse of the input oscillator. If a  
two is loaded the output is a divide by 2 signal  
with a 50% duty cycle. If a 3 or greater is  
loaded the output is low for 2 bits and high for  
the remainder of the count. The input clock to  
the BRG is a 1.8462 MHz clock.  
Bit 6  
This bit is the complement of the Ring Indicator  
(nRI) input. If bit 4 of the MCR is set to logic  
"1", this bit is equivalent to OUT1 in the MCR.  
Bit 7  
This bit is the complement of the Data Carrier  
Detect (nDCD) input. If bit 4 of the MCR is set  
to logic "1", this bit is equivalent to OUT2 in the  
MCR.  
Table 33 shows the baud rates possible with a  
1.8462 MHz crystal.  
Effect Of The Reset on Register File  
The Reset Function Table (Table 34) details the  
effect of the Reset input on each of the registers  
of the Serial Port.  
74  
B. Character times are calculated by using the  
RCLK input for a clock signal (this makes  
the delay proportional to the baudrate).  
FIFO INTERRUPT MODE OPERATION  
When the RCVR FIFO and receiver interrupts  
are enabled (FCR bit 0 = "1", IER bit 0 = "1"),  
RCVR interrupts occur as follows:  
C. When a timeout interrupt has occurred it is  
cleared and the timer reset when the CPU  
reads one character from the RCVR FIFO.  
A. The receive data available interrupt will be  
issued when the FIFO has reached its  
programmed trigger level; it is cleared as  
soon as the FIFO drops below its  
programmed trigger level.  
D. When a timeout interrupt has not occurred  
the timeout timer is reset after a new  
character is received or after the CPU reads  
the RCVR FIFO.  
B. The IIR receive data available indication also  
occurs when the FIFO trigger level is  
reached. It is cleared when the FIFO drops  
below the trigger level.  
When the XMIT FIFO and transmitter interrupts  
are enabled (FCR bit 0 = "1", IER bit 1 = "1"),  
XMIT interrupts occur as follows:  
A. The transmitter holding register interrupt  
(02H) occurs when the XMIT FIFO is empty;  
it is cleared as soon as the transmitter  
holding register is written to (1 of 16  
characters may be written to the XMIT FIFO  
while servicing this interrupt) or the IIR is  
read.  
C. The receiver line status interrupt (IIR=06H),  
has higher priority than the received data  
available (IIR=04H) interrupt.  
D. The data ready bit (LSR bit 0)is set as soon  
as a character is transferred from the shift  
register to the RCVR FIFO. It is reset when  
the FIFO is empty.  
B. The transmitter FIFO empty indications will  
be delayed 1 character time minus the last  
stop bit time whenever the following occurs:  
THRE=1 and there have not been at least  
two bytes at the same time in the transmitter  
FIFO since the last THRE=1. The transmitter  
interrupt after changing FCR0 will be  
immediate, if it is enabled.  
When RCVR FIFO and receiver interrupts are  
enabled, RCVR FIFO timeout interrupts occur  
as follows:  
A. A FIFO timeout interrupt occurs if all the  
following conditions exist:  
-
-
At least one character is in the FIFO.  
The most recent serial character received  
was longer than 4 continuous character  
times ago. (If 2 stop bits are programmed,  
the second one is included in this time  
delay).  
Character timeout and RCVR FIFO trigger level  
interrupts have the same priority as the current  
received data available interrupt; XMIT FIFO  
empty has the same priority as the current  
transmitter holding register empty interrupt.  
-
The most recent CPU read of the FIFO was  
longer than 4 continuous character times  
ago.  
This will cause a maximum character received  
to interrupt issued delay of 160 msec at 300  
BAUD with a 12 bit character.  
75  
the same way as when in the interrupt  
mode, the IIR is not affected since EIR bit  
2=0.  
-Bit 5 indicates when the XMIT FIFO is empty.  
-Bit 6 indicates that both the XMIT FIFO and  
shift register are empty.  
FIFO POLLED MODE OPERATION  
With FCR bit 0 = "1" resetting IER bits 0, 1, 2 or  
3 or all to zero puts the UART in the FIFO  
Polled Mode of operation. Since the RCVR and  
XMITTER are controlled separately, either one  
or both can be in the polled mode of operation.  
In this mode, the user's program will check  
RCVR and XMITTER status via the LSR. LSR  
definitions for the FIFO Polled Mode are as  
follows:  
-Bit 7 indicates whether there are any errors in  
the RCVR FIFO.  
There is no trigger level reached or timeout  
condition indicated in the FIFO Polled Mode,  
however, the RCVR and XMIT FIFOs are still  
fully capable of holding characters.  
-Bit 0=1 as long as there is one byte in the  
RCVR FIFO.  
-Bits 1 to 4 specify which error(s) have occurred.  
Character error status is handled  
Table 33 - Baud Rates Using 1.8462 MHz Clock for <= 38.4K; Using 1.8432MHz Clock  
for 115.2k ; Using 3.6864MHz Clock for 230.4k; Using 7.3728 MHz Clock for 460.8k  
DESIRED  
DIVISOR USED TO  
PERCENT ERROR DIFFERENCE  
CRxx:  
BAUD RATE  
GENERATE 16X CLOCK  
BETWEEN DESIRED AND ACTUAL*  
BIT 7 OR 6  
50  
75  
2304  
1536  
1047  
857  
768  
384  
192  
96  
0.001  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
-
110  
-
134.5  
150  
0.004  
-
300  
-
600  
-
1200  
1800  
2000  
2400  
3600  
4800  
7200  
9600  
19200  
38400  
57600  
115200  
230400  
-
64  
-
58  
0.005  
48  
-
32  
-
24  
-
-
16  
12  
-
6
-
3
0.030  
0.16  
0.16  
0.16  
2
1
32770  
76  
DESIRED  
DIVISOR USED TO  
PERCENT ERROR DIFFERENCE  
CRxx:  
BAUD RATE  
GENERATE 16X CLOCK  
BETWEEN DESIRED AND ACTUAL*  
BIT 7 OR 6  
460800  
32769  
0.16  
1
*Note: The percentage error for all baud rates, except where indicated otherwise, is 0.2%.  
Table 34 - Reset Function Table  
REGISTER/SIGNAL  
Interrupt Enable Register  
Interrupt Identification Reg.  
FIFO Control  
RESET CONTROL  
RESET  
RESET STATE  
All bits low  
RESET  
Bit 0 is high; Bits 1 - 7 low  
RESET  
All bits low  
Line Control Reg.  
MODEM Control Reg.  
Line Status Reg.  
MODEM Status Reg.  
TXD1, TXD2  
RESET  
All bits low  
RESET  
All bits low  
RESET  
All bits low except 5, 6 high  
RESET  
Bits 0 - 3 low; Bits 4 - 7 input  
RESET  
High  
Low  
Low  
INTRPT (RCVR errs)  
INTRPT (RCVR Data Ready)  
INTRPT (THRE)  
OUT2B  
RESET/Read LSR  
RESET/Read RBR  
RESET/ReadIIR/Write THR Low  
RESET  
RESET  
RESET  
RESET  
High  
RTSB  
High  
DTRB  
High  
OUT1B  
High  
RCVR FIFO  
RESET/  
All Bits Low  
FCR1*FCR0/_FCR0  
XMIT FIFO  
RESET/  
All Bits Low  
FCR1*FCR0/_FCR0  
77  
Table 35 - Register Summary for an Individual UART Channel  
REGISTER  
REGISTER  
ADDRESS*  
REGISTER NAME  
SYMBOL  
BIT 0  
BIT 1  
ADDR = 0  
DLAB = 0  
Receive Buffer Register (Read Only)  
RBR  
Data Bit 0  
(Note 1)  
Data Bit 1  
ADDR = 0  
DLAB = 0  
Transmitter Holding Register (Write Only)  
Interrupt Enable Register  
THR  
IER  
Data Bit 0  
Data Bit 1  
Enable  
ADDR = 1  
DLAB = 0  
Enable  
Received Data Transmitter  
Available  
Interrupt  
(ERDAI)  
Holding  
Register  
Empty  
Interrupt  
(ETHREI)  
ADDR = 2  
ADDR = 2  
Interrupt Ident. Register (Read Only)  
FIFO Control Register (Write Only)  
IIR  
"0" if Interrupt Interrupt ID Bit  
Pending  
FCR  
FIFO Enable  
RCVR FIFO  
Reset  
(Note 7)  
LCR  
Word Length  
Select Bit 0  
(WLS0)  
ADDR = 3  
Line Control Register  
Word Length  
Select Bit 1  
(WLS1)  
ADDR = 4  
ADDR = 5  
ADDR = 6  
MODEM Control Register  
Line Status Register  
MCR  
LSR  
Data Terminal Request to  
Ready (DTR) Send (RTS)  
Data Ready  
(DR)  
Overrun Error  
(OE)  
Delta Clear to  
Send (DCTS)  
MODEM Status Register  
MSR  
Delta Data Set  
Ready  
(DDSR)  
ADDR = 7  
Scratch Register (Note 4)  
Divisor Latch (LS)  
SCR  
DDL  
Bit 0  
Bit 0  
Bit 1  
Bit 1  
ADDR = 0  
DLAB = 1  
ADDR = 1  
DLAB = 1  
Divisor Latch (MS)  
DLM  
Bit 8  
Bit 9  
*DLAB is Bit 7 of the Line Control Register (ADDR = 3).  
Note 1: Bit 0 is the least significant bit. It is the first bit serially transmitted or received.  
Note 2: When operating in the XT mode, this bit will be set any time that the transmitter shift  
register is empty.  
78  
Table 35 - Register Summary for an Individual UART Channel (continued)  
BIT 2  
Data Bit 2  
Data Bit 2  
BIT 3  
Data Bit 3  
Data Bit 3  
BIT 4  
Data Bit 4  
Data Bit 4  
0
BIT 5  
Data Bit 5  
Data Bit 5  
0
BIT 6  
Data Bit 6  
Data Bit 6  
0
BIT 7  
Data Bit 7  
Data Bit 7  
0
Enable  
Receiver Line  
Status  
Enable  
MODEM  
Status  
Interrupt  
(ELSI)  
Interrupt  
(EMSI)  
FIFOs  
Enabled  
(Note 5)  
Interrupt ID  
Bit  
Interrupt ID  
Bit (Note 5)  
0
0
FIFOs  
Enabled  
(Note 5)  
XMIT FIFO  
Reset  
DMA Mode  
Select  
Reserved  
Reserved  
RCVR Trigger RCVR Trigger  
LSB  
MSB  
(Note 6)  
Divisor Latch  
Access Bit  
(DLAB)  
Number of  
Stop Bits  
(STB)  
Parity Enable Even Parity  
Stick Parity  
Set Break  
(PEN)  
Select (EPS)  
OUT1  
OUT2  
Loop  
0
0
0
(Note 3)  
(Note 3)  
Parity Error  
(PE)  
Framing Error Break  
(FE)  
Transmitter  
Interrupt (BI) Holding  
Transmitter  
Empty  
(TEMT)  
Error in  
RCVR FIFO  
(Note 5)  
Register  
(THRE)  
(Note 2)  
Data Carrier  
Detect (DCD)  
Trailing Edge Delta Data  
Ring Indicator Carrier Detect (CTS)  
Clear to Send Data Set  
Ring Indicator  
Ready (DSR) (RI)  
(TERI)  
(DDCD)  
Bit 2  
Bit 3  
Bit 4  
Bit 4  
Bit 12  
Bit 5  
Bit 5  
Bit 13  
Bit 6  
Bit 6  
Bit 14  
Bit 7  
Bit 7  
Bit 15  
Bit 2  
Bit 3  
Bit 10  
Bit 11  
Note 3: This bit no longer has a pin associated with it.  
Note 4: When operating in the XT mode, this register is not available.  
Note 5: These bits are always zero in the non-FIFO mode.  
Note 6: Writing a one to this bit has no effect. DMA modes are not supported in this chip.  
Note 7: The UART1 and UART2 FCR’s are shadowed in the UART1 FIFO Control Shadow  
Register (LD8:CRC3[7:0]) and UART2 FIFO Control Shadow Register (LD8:CRC4[7:0]).  
79  
NOTES ON SERIAL PORT OPERATION  
FIFO MODE OPERATION:  
until at least two bytes have the Tx FIFO  
empties after this condition, the Tx been  
loaded into the FIFO, concurrently. When  
interrupt will be activated without a one  
character delay.  
GENERAL  
The RCVR FIFO will hold up to 16 bytes  
regardless of which trigger level is selected.  
Rx support functions and operation are quite  
different from those described for the  
transmitter. The Rx FIFO receives data until the  
number of bytes in the FIFO equals the selected  
TX AND RX FIFO OPERATION  
interrupt trigger level.  
At that time if Rx  
The Tx portion of the UART transmits data  
through TXD as soon as the CPU loads a byte  
into the Tx FIFO. The UART will prevent  
loads to the Tx FIFO if it currently holds 16  
characters. Loading to the Tx FIFO will again  
be enabled as soon as the next character is  
transferred to the Tx shift register. These  
capabilities account for the largely autonomous  
operation of the Tx.  
interrupts are enabled, the UART will issue an  
interrupt to the CPU. The Rx FIFO will continue  
to store bytes until it holds 16 of them. It will  
not accept any more data when it is full. Any  
more data entering the Rx shift register will set  
the Overrun Error flag. Normally, the FIFO  
depth and the programmable trigger levels will  
give the CPU ample time to empty the Rx FIFO  
before an overrun occurs.  
The UART starts the above operations typically  
with a Tx interrupt. The chip issues a Tx  
interrupt whenever the Tx FIFO is empty and the  
Tx interrupt is enabled, except in the following  
instance. Assume that the Tx FIFO is empty  
and the CPU starts to load it. When the first  
byte enters the FIFO the Tx FIFO empty  
interrupt will transition from active to inactive.  
Depending on the execution speed of the service  
routine software, the UART may be able to  
transfer this byte from the FIFO to the shift  
register before the CPU loads another byte. If  
this happens, the Tx FIFO will be empty again  
and typically the UART's interrupt line would  
transition to the active state. This could cause a  
system with an interrupt control unit to record a  
Tx FIFO empty condition, even though the CPU  
is currently servicing that interrupt. Therefore,  
after the first byte has been loaded into the  
FIFO the UART will wait one serial character  
transmission time before issuing a new Tx  
FIFO empty interrupt. This one character Tx  
One side-effect of having a Rx FIFO is that the  
selected interrupt trigger level may be above the  
data level in the FIFO. This could occur when  
data at the end of the block contains fewer bytes  
than the trigger level. No interrupt would be  
issued to the CPU and the data would remain in  
the UART. To prevent the software from  
having to check for this situation the chip  
incorporates a timeout interrupt.  
The timeout interrupt is activated when there is  
a least one byte in the Rx FIFO, and neither the  
CPU nor the Rx shift register has accessed the  
Rx FIFO within 4 character times of the last  
byte. The timeout interrupt is cleared or reset  
when the CPU reads the Rx FIFO or another  
character enters it.  
These FIFO related features allow optimization  
of CPU/UART transactions and are especially  
useful given the higer baud rate capability (256  
kbaud).  
interrupt  
delay  
will  
remain  
active  
80  
INFRARED INTERFACE  
The infrared interface provides  
wireless communications port using infrared as  
transmission medium. Two IR  
implementations have been provided for the  
second UART in this chip (logical device 5),  
IrDA and Amplitude Shift Keyed IR. The IR  
transmission can use the standard UART2  
TXD2 and RXD2 pins or optional IRTX and  
IRRX pins. These can be selected through the  
configuration registers.  
a
two-way  
500KHz  
waveform for the duration of the  
serial bit time. A one is signaled by sending no  
transmission during the bit time. Please refer to  
the AC timing for the parameters of the ASK-IR  
waveform.  
a
If the Half Duplex option is chosen, there is a  
time-out when the direction of the transmission  
is changed. This time-out starts at the last bit  
transferred during a transmission and blocks the  
receiver input until the timeout expires. If the  
transmit buffer is loaded with more data before  
the time-out expires, the timer is restarted after  
the new byte is transmitted. If data is loaded  
into the transmit buffer while a character is  
being received, the transmission will not start  
until the time-out expires after the last receive  
bit has been received. If the start bit of another  
character is received during this time-out, the  
timer is restarted after the new character is  
received. The IR half duplex time-out is  
programmable via CRF2 in Logical Device 5.  
This register allows the time-out to be  
programmed to any value between 0 and  
10msec in 100usec increments.  
IrDA allows serial communication at baud rates  
up to 4 Mbps. Each word is sent serially  
beginning with a zero value start bit. A zero is  
signaled by sending a single IR pulse at the  
beginning of the serial bit time. A one is  
signaled by sending no IR pulse during the bit  
time. Please refer to the AC timing for the  
parameters of these pulses and the IrDA  
waveform.  
The Amplitude Shift Keyed IR allows serial  
communication at baud rates up to 19.2K Baud.  
Each word is sent serially beginning with a zero  
value start bit. A zero is signaled by sending a  
81  
FAST IR  
The following is a description of the top level  
connection for the Fast IR block in the  
FDC37C67x. Refer to the Infrared  
to control it, and the other has a second receive  
data channel (IRRX3). The FDC37C67x has two  
configuration bits that can be used for these  
Communications Controller Specification for  
more information on Fast IR.  
signals.  
These are IRMODESEL and  
IRRX3SEL. The following table illustrates the  
selection of the functions.  
There are two types of transceiver modules  
used for Fast IR: one has a mode pin (IR Mode)  
Table 36 - DRVDEN1 MUXING  
Mux Controls  
STATE OF  
PIN  
NAME  
DRVDEN  
1
IRMODESEL  
(LD8:CRC0.0)  
IRRX3SEL  
(LD8:CRC0.4)  
X
SELECTED  
FUNCTION  
DRVDEN1  
(default)  
IRMODE*1  
IRRX3  
UNCONNECTED  
INPUTS  
0
-
1
1
0
1
-
0
Note: *1 IRRX3SEL Default (0).  
82  
The figure below is the IR interface block diagram.  
RAW  
TXD2  
RXD2  
IRTX  
IRRX  
TX1  
TX2  
COM  
0
RX1  
TV  
ASK  
IrDA  
FIR  
1
0
1
IR  
RX2  
aux  
COM  
DRVDEN1  
1
0
IRMODE  
G.P. DATA  
FAST BIT  
FAST  
DRV_DEN1  
IRRX3SEL  
FDD  
IRMODESEL  
FIGURE 2 - IR INTERFACE BLOCK DIAGRAM  
83  
PARALLEL PORT  
The FDC37C67x incorporates an IBM XT/AT  
The parallel port also incorporates SMSC's  
ChiProtect circuitry, which prevents possible  
damage to the parallel port due to printer power-  
up.  
compatible parallel port. This supports the  
optional PS/2 type bi-directional parallel port  
(SPP), the Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP) and  
the Extended Capabilities Port (ECP) parallel  
port modes.  
Refer to the Configuration  
The functionality of the Parallel Port is achieved  
through the use of eight addressable ports,  
with their associated registers and control  
gating. The control and data port are read/write  
by the CPU, the status port is read/write in the  
EPP mode. The address map of the Parallel  
Port is shown below:  
Registers for information on disabling, power  
down, changing the base address of the parallel  
port, and selecting the mode of operation.  
The FDC37C67x also provides a mode for  
support of the floppy disk controller on the  
parallel port.  
DATA PORT  
BASE ADDRESS + 00H  
BASE ADDRESS + 01H  
BASE ADDRESS + 02H  
BASE ADDRESS + 03H  
EPP DATA PORT 0  
EPP DATA PORT 1  
EPP DATA PORT 2  
EPP DATA PORT 3  
BASE ADDRESS + 04H  
BASE ADDRESS + 05H  
BASE ADDRESS + 06H  
BASE ADDRESS + 07H  
STATUS PORT  
CONTROL PORT  
EPP ADDR PORT  
The bit map of these registers is:  
D0  
PD0  
D1  
PD1  
0
D2  
PD2  
0
D3  
D4  
D5  
PD5  
PE  
D6  
D7  
PD7  
Note  
DATA PORT  
PD3  
PD4  
PD6  
1
1
STATUS  
PORT  
TMOUT  
nERR  
SLCT  
nACK  
nBUSY  
CONTROL  
PORT  
STROBE AUTOFD  
nINIT  
PD2  
PD2  
PD2  
PD2  
PD2  
SLC  
PD3  
PD3  
PD3  
PD3  
PD3  
IRQE  
PD4  
PD4  
PD4  
PD4  
PD4  
PCD  
PD5  
PD5  
PD5  
PD5  
PD5  
0
0
1
EPP ADDR  
PORT  
PD0  
PD0  
PD0  
PD0  
PD0  
PD1  
PD1  
PD1  
PD1  
PD1  
PD6  
PD6  
PD6  
PD6  
PD6  
AD7  
PD7  
PD7  
PD7  
PD7  
2,3  
2,3  
2,3  
2,3  
2,3  
EPP DATA  
PORT 0  
EPP DATA  
PORT 1  
EPP DATA  
PORT 2  
EPP DATA  
PORT 3  
Note 1: These registers are available in all modes.  
Note 2: These registers are only available in EPP mode.  
Note 3 : For EPP mode, IOCHRDY must be connected to the ISA bus.  
84  
Table 37 - Parallel Port Connector  
HOST  
CONNECTOR  
PIN NUMBER  
STANDARD  
nStrobe  
EPP  
ECP  
1
nWrite  
PData<0:7>  
Intr  
nStrobe  
2-9  
10  
11  
12  
PData<0:7>  
nAck  
PData<0:7>  
nAck  
Busy  
nWait  
Busy, PeriphAck(3)  
PE  
(NU)  
PError,  
nAckReverse(3)  
13  
14  
Select  
(NU)  
Select  
nAutofd  
nDatastb  
nAutoFd,  
HostAck(3)  
15  
16  
17  
nError  
nInit  
(NU)  
nFault(1)  
nPeriphRequest(3)  
(NU)  
nInit(1)  
nReverseRqst(3)  
nSelectin  
nAddrstrb  
nSelectIn(1,3)  
(1) = Compatible Mode  
(3) = High Speed Mode  
Note:  
For the cable interconnection required for ECP support and the Slave Connector pin  
numbers, refer to the IEEE 1284 Extended Capabilities Port Protocol and ISA Standard, Rev.  
1.14, July 14, 1993. This document is available from Microsoft.  
85  
IBM XT/AT COMPATIBLE, BI-DIRECTIONAL  
AND EPP MODES  
BIT 3 nERR - nERROR  
The level on the nERROR input is read by the  
CPU as bit 3 of the Printer Status Register. A  
logic 0 means an error has been detected; a  
logic 1 means no error has been detected.  
DATA PORT  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 00H  
BIT 4 SLCT - PRINTER SELECTED STATUS  
The level on the SLCT input is read by the CPU  
as bit 4 of the Printer Status Register. A logic 1  
means the printer is on line; a logic 0 means it is  
not selected.  
The Data Port is located at an offset of '00H'  
from the base address. The data register is  
cleared at initialization by RESET. During a  
WRITE operation, the Data Register latches the  
contents of the data bus with the rising edge of  
the nIOW input. The contents of this register  
are buffered (non inverting) and output onto the  
PD0 - PD7 ports. During a READ operation in  
SPP mode, PD0 - PD7 ports are buffered (not  
latched) and output to the host CPU.  
BIT 5 PE - PAPER END  
The level on the PE input is read by the CPU as  
bit 5 of the Printer Status Register. A logic 1  
indicates a paper end; a logic 0 indicates the  
presence of paper.  
STATUS PORT  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 01H  
BIT 6 nACK - nACKNOWLEDGE  
The level on the nACK input is read by the CPU  
as bit 6 of the Printer Status Register. A logic 0  
means that the printer has received a character  
and can now accept another. A logic 1 means  
that it is still processing the last character or has  
not received the data.  
The Status Port is located at an offset of '01H'  
from the base address. The contents of this  
register are latched for the duration of an nIOR  
read cycle. The bits of the Status Port are  
defined as follows:  
BIT 7 nBUSY - nBUSY  
BIT 0 TMOUT - TIME OUT  
The complement of the level on the BUSY input  
is read by the CPU as bit 7 of the Printer Status  
Register. A logic 0 in this bit means that the  
printer is busy and cannot accept a new  
character. A logic 1 means that it is ready to  
accept the next character.  
This bit is valid in EPP mode only and indicates  
that a 10 usec time out has occured on the EPP  
bus. A logic O means that no time out error has  
occured; a logic 1 means that a time out error  
has been detected. This bit is cleared by a  
RESET. Writing a one to this bit clears the time  
out status bit. On a write, this bit is self clearing  
and does not require a write of a zero. Writing a  
zero to this bit has no effect.  
CONTROL PORT  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 02H  
The Control Port is located at an offset of '02H'  
from the base address. The Control Register is  
initialized by the RESET input, bits 0 to 5 only  
being affected; bits 6 and 7 are hard wired low.  
BITS 1, 2 - are not implemented as register bits,  
during a read of the Printer Status Register  
these bits are a low level.  
86  
The EPP Address Port is located at an offset of  
'03H' from the base address. The address  
register is cleared at initialization by RESET.  
During a WRITE operation, the contents of DB0-  
DB7 are buffered (non inverting) and output onto  
the PD0 - PD7 ports, the leading edge of nIOW  
causes an EPP ADDRESS WRITE cycle to be  
performed, the trailing edge of IOW latches the  
data for the duration of the EPP write cycle.  
During a READ operation, PD0 - PD7 ports are  
read, the leading edge of IOR causes an EPP  
ADDRESS READ cycle to be performed and the  
data output to the host CPU, the deassertion of  
ADDRSTB latches the PData for the duration of  
the IOR cycle. This register is only available in  
EPP mode.  
BIT 0 STROBE - STROBE  
This bit is inverted and output onto the  
nSTROBE output.  
BIT 1 AUTOFD - AUTOFEED  
This bit is inverted and output onto the  
nAUTOFD output. A logic 1 causes the printer  
to generate a line feed after each line is printed.  
A logic 0 means no autofeed.  
BIT 2 nINIT - nINITIATE OUTPUT  
This bit is output onto the nINIT output without  
inversion.  
BIT 3 SLCTIN - PRINTER SELECT INPUT  
This bit is inverted and output onto the nSLCTIN  
output. A logic 1 on this bit selects the printer; a  
logic 0 means the printer is not selected.  
EPP DATA PORT 0  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 04H  
BIT 4 IRQE - INTERRUPT REQUEST ENABLE  
The interrupt request enable bit when set to a  
high level may be used to enable interrupt  
requests from the Parallel Port to the CPU. An  
interrupt request is generated on the IRQ port by  
a positive going nACK input. When the IRQE  
bit is programmed low the IRQ is disabled.  
The EPP Data Port 0 is located at an offset of  
'04H' from the base address. The data register  
is cleared at initialization by RESET. During a  
WRITE operation, the contents of DB0-DB7 are  
buffered (non inverting) and output onto the PD0  
- PD7 ports, the leading edge of nIOW causes  
an EPP DATA WRITE cycle to be performed,  
the trailing edge of IOW latches the data for the  
duration of the EPP write cycle. During a READ  
operation, PD0 - PD7 ports are read, the leading  
edge of IOR causes an EPP READ cycle to be  
performed and the data output to the host CPU,  
the deassertion of DATASTB latches the PData  
for the duration of the IOR cycle. This register  
is only available in EPP mode.  
BIT 5 PCD - PARALLEL CONTROL DIRECTION  
Parallel Control Direction is not valid in printer  
mode. In printer mode, the direction is always  
out regardless of the state of this bit. In bi-  
directional, EPP or ECP mode, a logic 0 means  
that the printer port is in output mode (write); a  
logic 1 means that the printer port is in input  
mode (read).  
EPP DATA PORT 1  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 05H  
Bits 6 and 7 during a read are a low level, and  
cannot be written.  
The EPP Data Port 1 is located at an offset of  
'05H' from the base address. Refer to EPP  
DATA PORT 0 for a description of operation.  
This register is only available in EPP mode.  
EPP ADDRESS PORT  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 03H  
87  
Read, Write or Address cycle is currently  
executing, then the PDx bus is in the standard or  
bi-directional mode, and all output signals  
(STROBE, AUTOFD, INIT) are as set by the  
SPP Control Port and direction is controlled by  
PCD of the Control port.  
EPP DATA PORT 2  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 06H  
The EPP Data Port 2 is located at an offset of  
'06H' from the base address. Refer to EPP  
DATA PORT 0 for a description of operation.  
This register is only available in EPP mode.  
In EPP mode, the system timing is closely  
coupled to the EPP timing. For this reason, a  
watchdog timer is required to prevent system  
lockup. The timer indicates if more than 10usec  
have elapsed from the start of the EPP cycle  
(nIOR or nIOW asserted) to nWAIT being  
deasserted (after command). If a time-out  
occurs, the current EPP cycle is aborted and the  
time-out condition is indicated in Status bit 0.  
EPP DATA PORT 3  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 07H  
The EPP Data Port 3 is located at an offset of  
'07H' from the base address. Refer to EPP  
DATA PORT 0 for a description of operation.  
This register is only available in EPP mode.  
EPP 1.9 OPERATION  
During an EPP cycle, if STROBE is active, it  
overrides the EPP write signal forcing the PDx  
bus to always be in a write mode and the  
nWRITE signal to always be asserted.  
When the EPP mode is selected in the  
configuration register, the standard and bi-  
directional modes are also available. If no EPP  
88  
5. Chip asserts nDATASTB or nADDRSTRB  
indicating that PData bus contains valid  
information, and the WRITE signal is valid.  
6. Peripheral deasserts nWAIT, indicating that  
any setup requirements have been satisfied  
and the chip may begin the termination  
phase of the cycle.  
7. a) The chip deasserts nDATASTB or  
nADDRSTRB, this marks the beginning  
of the termination phase. If it has not  
already done so, the peripheral should  
latch the information byte now.  
Software Constraints  
Before an EPP cycle is executed, the software  
must ensure that the control register bit PCD is  
a logic "0" (ie a 04H or 05H should be written to  
the Control port). If the user leaves PCD as a  
logic "1", and attempts to perform an EPP write,  
the chip is unable to perform the write (because  
PCD is a logic "1") and will appear to perform an  
EPP read on the parallel bus, no error is  
indicated.  
b) The chip latches the data from the  
SData bus for the PData bus and  
asserts (releases) IOCHRDY allowing  
the host to complete the write cycle.  
EPP 1.9 Write  
The timing for a write operation (address or  
data) is shown in timing diagram EPP Write  
Data or Address cycle. IOCHRDY is driven  
active low at the start of each EPP write and is  
released when it has been determined that the  
write cycle can complete. The write cycle can  
complete under the following circumstances:  
8. Peripheral asserts nWAIT, indicating to the  
host that any hold time requirements have  
been satisfied and acknowledging the  
termination of the cycle.  
9. Chip may modify nWRITE and nPDATA in  
preparation for the next cycle.  
1. If the EPP bus is not ready (nWAIT is active  
low) when nDATASTB or nADDRSTB goes  
active then the write can complete when  
nWAIT goes inactive high.  
EPP 1.9 Read  
The timing for a read operation (data) is shown  
in timing diagram EPP Read Data cycle.  
IOCHRDY is driven active low at the start of  
each EPP read and is released when it has been  
determined that the read cycle can complete.  
The read cycle can complete under the following  
circumstances:  
2. If the EPP bus is ready (nWAIT is inactive  
high) then the chip must wait for it to go  
active low before changing the state of  
nDATASTB, nWRITE or nADDRSTB. The  
write can complete once nWAIT is  
determined inactive.  
1
If the EPP bus is not ready (nWAIT is active  
low) when nDATASTB goes active then the  
read can complete when nWAIT goes  
inactive high.  
Write Sequence of operation  
1. The host selects an EPP register, places  
data on the SData bus and drives nIOW  
active.  
2. The chip drives IOCHRDY inactive (low).  
3. If WAIT is not asserted, the chip must wait  
until WAIT is asserted.  
2. If the EPP bus is ready (nWAIT is inactive  
high) then the chip must wait for it to go  
active low before changing the state of  
WRITE or before nDATASTB goes active.  
The read can complete once nWAIT is  
determined inactive.  
4. The chip places address or data on PData  
bus, clears PDIR, and asserts nWRITE.  
89  
Read Sequence of Operation  
watchdog timer is required to prevent system  
lockup. The timer indicates if more than 10usec  
have elapsed from the start of the EPP cycle  
(nIOR or nIOW asserted) to the end of the cycle  
1. The host selects an EPP register and drives  
nIOR active.  
2. The chip drives IOCHRDY inactive (low).  
3. If WAIT is not asserted, the chip must wait  
until WAIT is asserted.  
nIOR or nIOW deasserted).  
occurs, the current EPP cycle is aborted and the  
time-out condition is indicated in Status bit 0.  
If a time-out  
4. The chip tri-states the PData bus and  
deasserts nWRITE.  
Software Constraints  
5. Chip asserts nDATASTB or nADDRSTRB  
indicating that PData bus is tri-stated, PDIR  
is set and the nWRITE signal is valid.  
6. Peripheral drives PData bus valid.  
7. Peripheral deasserts nWAIT, indicating that  
PData is valid and the chip may begin the  
termination phase of the cycle.  
Before an EPP cycle is executed, the software  
must ensure that the control register bits D0, D1  
and D3 are set to zero. Also, bit D5 (PCD) is a  
logic "0" for an EPP write or a logic "1" for and  
EPP read.  
8. a) The chip latches the data from the  
PData bus for the SData bus and  
deasserts nDATASTB or nADDRSTRB.  
This marks the beginning of the  
termination phase.  
EPP 1.7 Write  
The timing for a write operation (address or  
data) is shown in timing diagram EPP 1.7 Write  
Data or Address cycle. IOCHRDY is driven  
active low when nWAIT is active low during the  
EPP cycle. This can be used to extend the cycle  
b) The chip drives the valid data onto the  
SData bus and asserts (releases)  
IOCHRDY allowing the host to  
complete the read cycle.  
time.  
The write cycle can complete when  
nWAIT is inactive high.  
9. Peripheral tri-states the PData bus and  
asserts nWAIT, indicating to the host that  
the PData bus is tri-stated.  
Write Sequence of Operation  
10. Chip may modify nWRITE, PDIR and  
nPDATA in preparation for the next cycle.  
1. The host sets PDIR bit in the control  
register to a logic "0".  
nWRITE.  
This asserts  
EPP 1.7 OPERATION  
2. The host selects an EPP register, places  
data on the SData bus and drives nIOW  
active.  
3. The chip places address or data on PData  
bus.  
4. Chip asserts nDATASTB or nADDRSTRB  
indicating that PData bus contains valid  
information, and the WRITE signal is valid.  
5. If nWAIT is asserted, IOCHRDY is  
deasserted until the peripheral deasserts  
nWAIT or a time-out occurs.  
When the EPP 1.7 mode is selected in the  
configuration register, the standard and bi-  
directional modes are also available. If no EPP  
Read, Write or Address cycle is currently  
executing, then the PDx bus is in the standard or  
bi-directional mode, and all output signals  
(STROBE, AUTOFD, INIT) are as set by the  
SPP Control Port and direction is controlled by  
PCD of the Control port.  
6. When the host deasserts nIOW the chip  
deasserts nDATASTB or nADDRSTRB and  
latches the data from the SData bus for the  
PData bus.  
In EPP mode, the system timing is closely  
coupled to the EPP timing. For this reason, a  
90  
7. Chip may modify nWRITE, PDIR and  
nPDATA in preparation of the next cycle.  
Read Sequence of Operation  
1. The host sets PDIR bit in the control  
register to a logic "1". This deasserts  
nWRITE and tri-states the PData bus.  
2. The host selects an EPP register and drives  
nIOR active.  
3. Chip asserts nDATASTB or nADDRSTRB  
indicating that PData bus is tri-stated, PDIR  
is set and the nWRITE signal is valid.  
EPP 1.7 Read  
The timing for a read operation (data) is shown  
in timing diagram EPP 1.7 Read Data cycle.  
IOCHRDY is driven active low when nWAIT is  
active low during the EPP cycle. This can be  
used to extend the cycle time. The read cycle  
can complete when nWAIT is inactive high.  
4. If nWAIT is asserted, IOCHRDY is  
deasserted until the peripheral deasserts  
nWAIT or a time-out occurs.  
5. The Peripheral drives PData bus valid.  
6. The Peripheral deasserts nWAIT, indicating  
that PData is valid and the chip may begin  
the termination phase of the cycle.  
7. When the host deasserts nIOR the chip  
deasserts nDATASTB or nADDRSTRB.  
8. Peripheral tri-states the PData bus.  
9. Chip may modify nWRITE, PDIR and  
nPDATA in preparation of the next cycle.  
91  
Table 38 - EPP Pin Descriptions  
EPP  
SIGNAL  
EPP NAME  
nWrite  
TYPE  
EPP DESCRIPTION  
This signal is active low. It denotes a write operation.  
nWRITE  
PD<0:7>  
INTR  
O
Address/Data  
Interrupt  
I/O  
I
Bi-directional EPP byte wide address and data bus.  
This signal is active high and positive edge triggered. (Pass  
through with no inversion, Same as SPP.)  
WAIT  
nWait  
I
This signal is active low. It is driven inactive as a positive  
acknowledgement from the device that the transfer of data  
is completed. It is driven active as an indication that the  
device is ready for the next transfer.  
DATASTB nData Strobe  
RESET nReset  
O
O
O
This signal is active low. It is used to denote data read or  
write operation.  
This signal is active low.  
When driven active, the EPP  
device is reset to its initial operational mode.  
ADDRSTB nAddress  
Strobe  
This signal is active low. It is used to denote address read  
or write operation.  
PE  
Paper End  
I
I
Same as SPP mode.  
Same as SPP mode.  
SLCT  
Printer  
Selected  
Status  
nERR  
PDIR  
Error  
I
Same as SPP mode.  
Parallel Port  
Direction  
O
This output shows the direction of the data transfer on the  
parallel port bus. A low means an output/write condition and  
a high means an input/read condition. This signal is  
normally a low (output/write) unless PCD of the control  
register is set or if an EPP read cycle is in progress.  
Note 1: SPP and EPP can use 1 common register.  
Note 2: nWrite is the only EPP output that can be over-ridden by SPP control port during an EPP  
cycle. For correct EPP read cycles, PCD is required to be a low.  
92  
reverse: Peripheral to Host communication  
Pword: A port word; equal in size to the width  
of the ISA interface. For this  
implementation, PWord is always 8  
bits.  
EXTENDED CAPABILITIES PARALLEL PORT  
ECP provides a number of advantages, some of  
which are listed below. The individual features  
are explained in greater detail in the remainder  
of this section.  
1
0
A high level.  
A low level.  
·
·
·
High performance half-duplex forward and  
reverse channel  
Interlocked handshake, for fast reliable  
transfer  
Optional single byte RLE compression for  
improved throughput (64:1)  
Channel addressing for low-cost peripherals  
Maintains link and data layer separation  
Permits the use of active output drivers  
Permits the use of adaptive signal timing  
Peer-to-peer capability  
These terms may be considered synonymous:  
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
PeriphClk, nAck  
HostAck, nAutoFd  
PeriphAck, Busy  
nPeriphRequest, nFault  
nReverseRequest, nInit  
nAckReverse, PError  
Xflag, Select  
ECPMode, nSelectln  
HostClk, nStrobe  
·
·
·
·
·
Vocabulary  
The following terms are used in this document:  
Reference Document: IEEE 1284 Extended  
Capabilities Port Protocol and ISA Interface  
assert: When a signal asserts it transitions to a  
"true" state, when a signal deasserts it  
transitions to a "false" state.  
Standard, Rev 1.14, July 14, 1993.  
document is available from Microsoft.  
This  
forward: Host to Peripheral communication.  
The bit map of the Extended Parallel Port  
registers is:  
D7  
PD7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Note  
data  
PD6  
PD5  
PD4  
PD3  
PD2  
PD1  
PD0  
ecpAFifo  
dsr  
Addr/RLE  
nBusy  
0
Address or RLE field  
2
1
1
2
2
2
nAck  
0
PError  
Select  
ackIntEn  
nFault  
0
0
0
dcr  
Direction  
SelectIn  
nInit  
autofd  
strobe  
cFifo  
ecpDFifo  
tFifo  
Parallel Port Data FIFO  
ECP Data FIFO  
Test FIFO  
cnfgA  
cnfgB  
ecr  
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
compress  
intrValue  
MODE  
Parallel Port IRQ  
nErrIntrEn  
Parallel Port DMA  
dmaEn  
serviceIntr  
full  
empty  
Note 1: These registers are available in all modes.  
Note 2: All FIFOs use one common 16 byte FIFO.  
Note 3: The ECP Parallel Port Config Reg B reflects the IRQ and DRQ selected by the Configuration  
Registers.  
93  
rather it provides an automatic high  
burst-bandwidth channel that supports DMA for  
ECP in both the forward and reverse directions.  
ISA IMPLEMENTATION STANDARD  
This specification describes the standard ISA  
interface to the Extended Capabilities Port  
(ECP). All ISA devices supporting ECP must  
meet the requirements contained in this section  
or the port will not be supported by Microsoft.  
For a description of the ECP Protocol, please  
refer to the IEEE 1284 Extended Capabilities  
Port Protocol and ISA Interface Standard, Rev.  
1.14, July 14, 1993. This document is available  
from Microsoft.  
Small FIFOs are employed in both forward and  
reverse directions to smooth data flow and  
improve the maximum bandwidth requirement.  
The size of the FIFO is 16 bytes deep. The port  
supports an automatic handshake for the  
standard parallel port to improve compatibility  
mode transfer speed.  
The port also supports run length encoded  
(RLE) decompression (required) in hardware.  
Compression is accomplished by counting  
identical bytes and transmitting an RLE byte  
that indicates how many times the next byte is  
to be repeated. Decompression simply  
intercepts the RLE byte and repeats the  
following byte the specified number of times.  
Hardware support for compression is optional.  
Description  
The port is software and hardware compatible  
with existing parallel ports so that it may be  
used as a standard LPT port if ECP is not  
required. The port is designed to be simple and  
requires a small number of gates to implement.  
It does not do any "protocol" negotiation,  
94  
Table 39 - ECP Pin Descriptions  
DESCRIPTION  
NAME  
nStrobe  
TYPE  
O
During write operations nStrobe registers data or address into the slave  
on the asserting edge (handshakes with Busy).  
PData 7:0  
nAck  
I/O  
I
Contains address or data or RLE data.  
Indicates valid data driven by the peripheral when asserted. This signal  
handshakes with nAutoFd in reverse.  
PeriphAck (Busy)  
I
I
This signal deasserts to indicate that the peripheral can accept data.  
This signal handshakes with nStrobe in the forward direction. In the  
reverse direction this signal indicates whether the data lines contain  
ECP command information or data. The peripheral uses this signal to  
flow control in the forward direction. It is an "interlocked" handshake  
with nStrobe. PeriphAck also provides command information in the  
reverse direction.  
PError  
Used to acknowledge a change in the direction the transfer (asserted =  
(nAckReverse)  
forward).  
nReverseRequest.  
The peripheral drives this signal low to acknowledge  
It is an "interlocked" handshake with  
nReverseRequest. The host relies upon nAckReverse to determine  
when it is permitted to drive the data bus.  
Select  
I
Indicates printer on line.  
nAutoFd  
O
Requests a byte of data from the peripheral when asserted,  
(HostAck)  
handshaking with nAck in the reverse direction. In the forward direction  
this signal indicates whether the data lines contain ECP address or  
data. The host drives this signal to flow control in the reverse direction.  
It is an "interlocked" handshake with nAck. HostAck also provides  
command information in the forward phase.  
nFault  
(nPeriphRequest)  
I
Generates an error interrupt when asserted. This signal provides a  
mechanism for peer-to-peer communication. This signal is valid only in  
the forward direction. During ECP Mode the peripheral is permitted  
(but not required) to drive this pin low to request a reverse transfer. The  
request is merely a "hint" to the host; the host has ultimate control over  
the transfer direction. This signal would be typically used to generate  
an interrupt to the host CPU.  
nInit  
O
O
Sets the transfer direction (asserted = reverse, deasserted = forward).  
This pin is driven low to place the channel in the reverse direction. The  
peripheral is only allowed to drive the bi-directional data bus while in  
ECP Mode and HostAck is low and nSelectIn is high.  
nSelectIn  
Always deasserted in ECP mode.  
95  
to avoid conflict with standard ISA devices. The  
port is equivalent to a generic parallel port  
interface and may be operated in that mode.  
The port registers vary depending on the mode  
field in the ecr. The table below lists these  
dependencies. Operation of the devices in  
modes other that those specified is undefined.  
Register Definitions  
The register definitions are based on the  
standard IBM addresses for LPT. All of the  
standard printer ports are supported.  
additional registers attach to an upper bit  
decode of the standard LPT port definition  
The  
Table 40 - ECP Register Definitions  
ADDRESS (Note 1) ECP MODES  
NAME  
FUNCTION  
Data Register  
data  
+000h R/W  
+000h R/W  
+001h R/W  
+002h R/W  
+400h R/W  
+400h R/W  
+400h R/W  
+400h R  
000-001  
011  
All  
ecpAFifo  
dsr  
ECP FIFO (Address)  
Status Register  
dcr  
All  
Control Register  
cFifo  
ecpDFifo  
tFifo  
010  
011  
110  
111  
111  
All  
Parallel Port Data FIFO  
ECP FIFO (DATA)  
Test FIFO  
cnfgA  
cnfgB  
ecr  
Configuration Register A  
Configuration Register B  
Extended Control Register  
+401h R/W  
+402h R/W  
Note 1: These addresses are added to the parallel port base address as selected by configuration  
register or jumpers.  
Note 2: All addresses are qualified with AEN. Refer to the AEN pin definition.  
Table 41 - Mode Descriptions  
MODE  
000  
001  
010  
011  
100  
101  
110  
111  
DESCRIPTION*  
SPP mode  
PS/2 Parallel Port mde  
Parallel Port Data FIFO mode  
ECP Parallel Port mode  
EPP mode (If this option is enabled in the configuration registers)  
(Reserved)  
Test mode  
Configuration mode  
*Refer to ECR Register Description  
96  
DATA and ecpAFifo PORT  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 00H  
BIT 5 PError  
The level on the PError input is read by the CPU  
as bit 5 of the Device Status Register. Printer  
Status Register.  
Modes 000 and 001 (Data Port)  
BIT 6 nAck  
The Data Port is located at an offset of '00H'  
from the base address. The data register is  
cleared at initialization by RESET. During a  
WRITE operation, the Data Register latches the  
contents of the data bus on the rising edge of  
the nIOW input. The contents of this register  
are buffered (non inverting) and output onto the  
PD0 - PD7 ports. During a READ operation,  
PD0 - PD7 ports are read and output to the host  
CPU.  
The level on the nAck input is read by the CPU  
as bit 6 of the Device Status Register.  
BIT 7 nBusy  
The complement of the level on the BUSY input  
is read by the CPU as bit 7 of the Device Status  
Register.  
DEVICE CONTROL REGISTER (dcr)  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 02H  
The Control Register is located at an offset of  
'02H' from the base address. The Control  
Register is initialized to zero by the RESET  
input, bits 0 to 5 only being affected; bits 6 and  
7 are hard wired low.  
BIT 0 STROBE - STROBE  
This bit is inverted and output onto the  
nSTROBE output.  
Mode 011 (ECP FIFO - Address/RLE)  
A data byte written to this address is placed in  
the FIFO and tagged as an ECP Address/RLE.  
The hardware at the ECP port transmitts this  
byte to the peripheral automatically.  
The  
operation of this register is ony defined for the  
forward direction (direction is 0). Refer to the  
ECP Parallel Port Forward Timing Diagram,  
located in the Timing Diagrams section of this  
data sheet .  
BIT 1 AUTOFD - AUTOFEED  
This bit is inverted and output onto the  
nAUTOFD output. A logic 1 causes the printer  
to generate a line feed after each line is printed.  
A logic 0 means no autofeed.  
BIT 2 nINIT - nINITIATE OUTPUT  
This bit is output onto the nINIT output without  
inversion.  
DEVICE STATUS REGISTER (dsr)  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 01H  
The Status Port is located at an offset of '01H'  
from the base address. Bits 0 - 2 are not  
implemented as register bits, during a read of  
the Printer Status Register these bits are a low  
level. The bits of the Status Port are defined as  
follows:  
BIT 3 SELECTIN  
This bit is inverted and output onto the nSLCTIN  
output. A logic 1 on this bit selects the printer; a  
logic 0 means the printer is not selected.  
BIT 4 ackIntEn - INTERRUPT REQUEST  
ENABLE  
The interrupt request enable bit when set to a  
high level may be used to enable interrupt  
requests from the Parallel Port to the CPU due  
to a low to high transition on the nACK input.  
Refer to the description of the interrupt under  
Operation, Interrupts.  
BIT 3 nFault  
The level on the nFault input is read by the CPU  
as bit 3 of the Device Status Register.  
BIT 4 Select  
The level on the Select input is read by the CPU  
as bit 4 of the Device Status Register.  
97  
Data in the tFIFO will not be transmitted to the  
to the parallel port lines using a hardware  
BIT 5 DIRECTION  
If mode=000 or mode=010, this bit has no effect  
and the direction is always out regardless of the  
state of this bit. In all other modes, Direction is  
valid and a logic 0 means that the printer port is  
in output mode (write); a logic 1 means that the  
printer port is in input mode (read).  
protocol handshake.  
However, data in the  
tFIFO may be displayed on the parallel port data  
lines.  
The tFIFO will not stall when overwritten or  
underrun. If an attempt is made to write data to  
a full tFIFO, the new data is not accepted into  
the tFIFO. If an attempt is made to read data  
from an empty tFIFO, the last data byte is re-  
read again. The full and empty bits must  
always keep track of the correct FIFO state. The  
tFIFO will transfer data at the maximum ISA  
rate so that software may generate performance  
metrics.  
BITS 6 and 7 during a read are a low level, and  
cannot be written.  
cFifo (Parallel Port Data FIFO)  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 400h  
Mode = 010  
Bytes written or DMAed from the system to this  
FIFO are transmitted by a hardware handshake  
to the peripheral using the standard parallel port  
The FIFO size and interrupt threshold can be  
determined by writing bytes to the FIFO and  
checking the full and serviceIntr bits.  
protocol.  
Transfers to the FIFO are byte  
aligned. This mode is only defined for the  
forward direction.  
The writeIntrThreshold can be derermined by  
starting with a full tFIFO, setting the direction bit  
to 0 and emptying it a byte at a time until  
serviceIntr is set. This may generate a spurious  
interrupt, but will indicate that the threshold has  
been reached.  
ecpDFifo (ECP Data FIFO)  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 400H  
Mode = 011  
Bytes written or DMAed from the system to this  
FIFO, when the direction bit is 0, are transmitted  
by a hardware handshake to the peripheral  
using the ECP parallel port protocol. Transfers  
to the FIFO are byte aligned.  
The readIntrThreshold can be derermined by  
setting the direction bit to 1 and filling the empty  
tFIFO a byte at a time until serviceIntr is set.  
This may generate a spurious interrupt, but will  
indicate that the threshold has been reached.  
Data bytes from the peripheral are read under  
automatic hardware handshake from ECP into  
this FIFO when the direction bit is 1. Reads or  
DMAs from the FIFO will return bytes of ECP  
data to the system.  
Data bytes are always read from the head of  
tFIFO regardless of the value of the direction bit.  
For example if 44h, 33h, 22h is written to the  
FIFO, then reading the tFIFO will return 44h,  
33h, 22h in the same order as was written.  
cnfgA (Configuration Register A)  
tFifo (Test FIFO Mode)  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 400H  
Mode = 110  
Data bytes may be read, written or DMAed to or  
from the system to this FIFO in any direction.  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 400H  
Mode = 111  
98  
This register is a read only register. When read,  
10H is returned. This indicates to the system  
that this is an 8-bit implementation. (PWord = 1  
byte)  
BIT 3 dmaEn  
Read/Write  
1: Enables DMA (DMA starts when serviceIntr  
is 0).  
0: Disables DMA unconditionally.  
cnfgB (Configuration Register B)  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 401H  
Mode = 111  
BIT 2 serviceIntr  
Read/Write  
1: Disables DMA and all of the service  
interrupts.  
BIT 7 compress  
0: Enables one of the following 3 cases of  
interrupts. Once one of the 3 service  
interrupts has occurred serviceIntr bit shall  
be set to a 1 by hardware. It must be reset  
to 0 to re-enable the interrupts. Writing this  
bit to a 1 will not cause an interrupt.  
case dmaEn=1:  
This bit is read only. During a read it is a low  
level. This means that this chip does not  
support hardware RLE compression. It does  
support hardware de-compression!  
BIT 6 intrValue  
Returns the value on the ISA iRq line to  
determine possible conflicts.  
BITS [3:0] Parallel Port IRQ  
Refer to Table 41B.  
During DMA (this bit is set to a 1 when  
terminal count is reached).  
case dmaEn=0 direction=0:  
This bit shall be set to 1 whenever there are  
writeIntrThreshold or more bytes free in the  
FIFO.  
case dmaEn=0 direction=1:  
This bit shall be set to 1 whenever there are  
readIntrThreshold or more valid bytes to be  
read from the FIFO.  
BITS [2:0] Parallel Port DMA  
Refer to Table 41C.  
ecr (Extended Control Register)  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 402H  
Mode = all  
This register controls the extended ECP parallel  
port functions.  
BITS 7,6,5  
BIT 1 full  
Read only  
These bits are Read/Write and select the Mode.  
BIT 4 nErrIntrEn  
1: The FIFO cannot accept another byte or the  
FIFO is completely full.  
0: The FIFO has at least 1 free byte.  
BIT 0 empty  
Read only  
Read/Write (Valid only in ECP Mode)  
1: Disables the interrupt generated on the  
asserting edge of nFault.  
0: Enables an interrupt pulse on the high to  
low edge of nFault. Note that an interrupt  
will be generated if nFault is asserted  
(interrupting) and this bit is written from a 1  
to a 0. This prevents interrupts from being  
lost in the time between the read of the ecr  
and the write of the ecr.  
1: The FIFO is completely empty.  
0: The FIFO contains at least 1 byte of data.  
99  
Table 42A - Extended Control Register  
MODE  
R/W  
000: Standard Parallel Port Mode . In this mode the FIFO is reset and common collector drivers  
are used on the control lines (nStrobe, nAutoFd, nInit and nSelectIn). Setting the direction  
bit will not tri-state the output drivers in this mode.  
001: PS/2 Parallel Port Mode. Same as above except that direction may be used to tri-state the  
data lines and reading the data register returns the value on the data lines and not the  
value in the data register. All drivers have active pull-ups (push-pull).  
010: Parallel Port FIFO Mode. This is the same as 000 except that bytes are written or DMAed to  
the FIFO. FIFO data is automatically transmitted using the standard parallel port protocol.  
Note that this mode is only useful when direction is 0. All drivers have active pull-ups  
(push-pull).  
011: ECP Parallel Port Mode. In the forward direction (direction is 0) bytes placed into the  
ecpDFifo and bytes written to the ecpAFifo are placed in a single FIFO and transmitted  
automatically to the peripheral using ECP Protocol. In the reverse direction (direction is 1)  
bytes are moved from the ECP parallel port and packed into bytes in the ecpDFifo. All  
drivers have active pull-ups (push-pull).  
100: Selects EPP Mode: In this mode, EPP is selected if the EPP supported option is selected in  
configuration register L3-CRF0. All drivers have active pull-ups (push-pull).  
101: Reserved  
110: Test Mode. In this mode the FIFO may be written and read, but the data will not be  
transmitted on the parallel port. All drivers have active pull-ups (push-pull).  
111: Configuration Mode. In this mode the confgA, confgB registers are accessible at 0x400 and  
0x401. All drivers have active pull-ups (push-pull).  
Table 42B  
CONFIG REG B  
Table 42C  
CONFIG REG B  
IRQ SELECTED  
BITS 5:3  
DMA SELECTED  
BITS 2:0  
15  
110  
3
011  
14  
101  
100  
011  
010  
001  
111  
000  
2
1
010  
001  
000  
11  
10  
All Others  
9
7
5
All Others  
100  
OPERATION  
After negotiation, it is necessary to initialize  
some of the port bits. The following are required:  
Mode Switching/Software Control  
·
·
Set Direction = 0, enabling the drivers.  
Set strobe = 0, causing the nStrobe signal  
to default to the deasserted state.  
Set autoFd = 0, causing the nAutoFd  
signal to default to the deasserted state.  
Set mode = 011 (ECP Mode)  
Software will execute P1284 negotiation and all  
operation prior to a data transfer phase under  
programmed I/O control (mode 000 or 001).  
Hardware provides an automatic control line  
handshake, moving data between the FIFO and  
the ECP port only in the data transfer phase  
(modes 011 or 010).  
·
·
ECP address/RLE bytes or data bytes may be  
sent automatically by writing the ecpAFifo or  
ecpDFifo respectively.  
Setting the mode to 011 or 010 will cause the  
hardware to initiate data transfer.  
If the port is in mode 000 or 001 it may switch to  
any other mode. If the port is not in mode 000  
or 001 it can only be switched into mode 000 or  
001. The direction can only be changed in  
mode 001.  
Note that all FIFO data transfers are byte wide  
and byte aligned. Address/RLE transfers are  
byte-wide and only allowed in the forward  
direction.  
The host may switch directions by first switching  
to mode = 001, negotiating for the forward or  
reverse channel, setting direction to 1 or 0, then  
setting mode = 011. When direction is 1 the  
hardware shall handshake for each ECP read  
data byte and attempt to fill the FIFO. Bytes  
may then be read from the ecpDFifo as long as  
it is not empty.  
Once in an extended forward mode the software  
should wait for the FIFO to be empty before  
switching back to mode 000 or 001. In this case  
all control signals will be deasserted before the  
mode switch. In an ecp reverse mode the  
software waits for all the data to be read from  
the FIFO before changing back to mode 000 or  
001. Since the automatic hardware ecp reverse  
handshake only cares about the state of the  
FIFO it may have acquired extra data which will  
be discarded. It may in fact be in the middle of a  
transfer when the mode is changed back to 000  
or 001. In this case the port will deassert  
nAutoFd independent of the state of the transfer.  
The design shall not cause glitches on the  
handshake signals if the software meets the  
constraints above.  
ECP transfers may also be accomplished (albeit  
slowly) by handshaking individual bytes under  
program control in mode = 001, or 000.  
Termination from ECP Mode  
Termination from ECP Mode is similar to the  
termination from Nibble/Byte Modes. The host is  
permitted to terminate from ECP Mode only in  
specific well-defined states. The termination can  
only be executed while the bus is in the forward  
direction. To terminate while the channel is in  
the reverse direction, it must first be transitioned  
into the forward direction.  
ECP Operation  
Prior to ECP operation the Host must negotiate  
on the parallel port to determine if the peripheral  
supports  
the  
ECP protocol. This is a  
somewhat complex negotiation carried out  
under program control in mode 000.  
101  
The most significant bit of the command  
indicates whether it is a run-length count (for  
compression) or a channel address.  
Command/Data  
ECP Mode supports two advanced features to  
improve the effectiveness of the protocol for  
When in the reverse direction, normal data is  
transferred when PeriphAck is high and an 8 bit  
command is transferred when PeriphAck is low.  
The most significant bit of the command is  
always zero. Reverse channel addresses are  
seldom used and may not be supported in  
hardware.  
some  
applications.  
The  
features  
are  
implemented by allowing the transfer of normal  
8 bit data or 8 bit commands.  
When in the forward direction, normal data is  
transferred when HostAck is high and an 8 bit  
command is transferred when HostAck is low.  
102  
Table 43  
Forward Channel Commands (HostAck Low)  
Reverse Channel Commands (PeripAck Low)  
D7  
D[6:0]  
0
Run-Length Count (0-127)  
(mode 0011 0X00 only)  
1
Channel Address (0-127)  
Data Compression  
Pin Definition  
The ECP port supports run length encoded  
(RLE) decompression in hardware and can  
transfer compressed data to a peripheral. Run  
length encoded (RLE) compression in hardware  
is not supported. To transfer compressed data  
in ECP mode, the compression count is written  
to the ecpAFifo and the data byte is written to  
the ecpDFifo.  
The drivers for nStrobe, nAutoFd, nInit and  
nSelectIn are open-collector in mode 000 and  
are push-pull in all other modes.  
ISA Connections  
The interface can never stall causing the host to  
hang. The width of data transfers is strictly  
controlled on an I/O address basis per this  
specification. All FIFO-DMA transfers are byte  
wide, byte aligned and end on a byte boundary.  
(The PWord value can be obtained by reading  
Configuration Register A, cnfgA, described in  
the next section.) Single byte wide transfers  
are always possible with standard or PS/2  
mode using program control of the control  
signals.  
Compression is accomplished by counting  
identical bytes and transmitting an RLE byte  
that indicates how many times the next byte is  
to be repeated.  
Decompression simply  
intercepts the RLE byte and repeats the  
following byte the specified number of times.  
When a run-length count is received from a  
peripheral, the subsequent data byte is  
replicated the specified number of times. A  
run-length count of zero specifies that only one  
byte of data is represented by the next data  
byte, whereas a run-length count of 127  
indicates that the next byte should be expanded  
to 128 bytes. To prevent data expansion,  
however, run-length counts of zero should be  
avoided.  
Interrupts  
The interrupts are enabled by serviceIntr in the  
ecr register.  
serviceIntr = 1 Disables the DMA and all of the  
service interrupts.  
serviceIntr = 0 Enables the selected interrupt  
condition. If the interrupting  
condition is valid, then the  
interrupt  
is  
generated  
immediately when this bit is  
changed from a 1 to a 0. This  
can occur during Programmed  
103  
I/O if the number of bytes  
removed or added from/to the  
FIFO does not cross the  
threshold.  
FIFO Operation  
The FIFO threshold is set in the chip  
configuration registers. All data transfers to or  
from the parallel port can proceed in DMA or  
Programmed I/O (non-DMA) mode as indicated  
by the selected mode. The FIFO is used by  
selecting the Parallel Port FIFO mode or ECP  
Parallel Port Mode. (FIFO test mode will be  
addressed separately.) After a reset, the FIFO  
is disabled. Each data byte is transferred by a  
Programmed I/O cycle or PDRQ depending on  
the selection of DMA or Programmed I/O mode.  
The interrupt generated is ISA friendly in that it  
must pulse the interrupt line low, allowing for  
interrupt sharing.  
After a brief pulse low  
following the interrupt event, the interrupt line is  
tri-stated so that other interrupts may assert.  
An interrupt is generated when:  
1. For DMA transfers: When serviceIntr is 0,  
dmaEn is 1 and the DMA TC is received.  
The following paragraphs detail the operation of  
the FIFO flow control. In these descriptions,  
2. For Programmed I/O:  
<threshold> ranges from  
1
to 16.  
The  
a.  
When serviceIntr is 0, dmaEn is 0,  
direction is and there are  
writeIntrThreshold or more free bytes in  
the FIFO. Also, an interrupt is  
generated when serviceIntr is cleared  
to whenever there are  
parameter FIFOTHR, which the user programs,  
is one less and ranges from 0 to 15.  
0
A low threshold value (i.e. 2) results in longer  
periods of time between service requests, but  
requires faster servicing of the request for both  
read and write cases. The host must be very  
responsive to the service request. This is the  
0
writeIntrThreshold or more free bytes in  
the FIFO.  
b.(1)  
When serviceIntr is 0, dmaEn  
is 0, direction is 1 and there  
are readIntrThreshold or more  
bytes in the FIFO. Also, an  
interrupt is generated when  
desired case for use with a "fast" system.  
A
high value of threshold (i.e. 12) is used with a  
"sluggish" system by affording a long latency  
period after a service request, but results in  
more frequent service requests.  
serviceIntr is cleared to  
whenever there  
0
are  
DMA TRANSFERS  
readIntrThreshold or more  
bytes in the FIFO.  
DMA transfers are always to or from the  
ecpDFifo, tFifo or CFifo. DMA utilizes the  
standard PC DMA services. To use the DMA  
transfers, the host first sets up the direction and  
state as in the programmed I/O case. Then it  
programs the DMA controller in the host with the  
desired count and memory address. Lastly it  
sets dmaEn to 1 and serviceIntr to 0. The ECP  
requests DMA transfers from the host by  
activating the PDRQ pin. The DMA will empty  
or fill the FIFO using the appropriate direction  
and mode. When the terminal count in the DMA  
controller is reached, an interrupt is generated  
3. When nErrIntrEn is 0 and nFault transitions  
from high to low or when nErrIntrEn is set  
from 1 to 0 and nFault is asserted.  
4. When ackIntEn is 1 and the nAck signal  
transitions from a low to a high.  
104  
and serviceIntr is asserted, disabling DMA. In  
order to prevent possible blocking of refresh  
requests dReq shall not be asserted for more  
than 32 DMA cycles in a row. The FIFO is  
enabled directly by asserting nPDACK and  
addresses need not be valid. PINTR is  
generated when a TC is received. PDRQ must  
not be asserted for more than 32 DMA cycles in  
a row. After the 32nd cycle, PDRQ must be  
kept unasserted until nPDACK is deasserted for  
a minimum of 350nsec. (Note: The only way to  
properly terminate DMA transfers is with a TC.)  
then PDRQ is active again as soon as there is  
one byte in the FIFO. If PDRQ goes inactive  
due to the TC, then PDRQ is active again when  
there is one byte in the FIFO, and serviceIntr  
has been re-enabled. (Note: A data underrun  
may occur if PDRQ is not removed in time to  
prevent an unwanted cycle.)  
Programmed I/O Mode or Non-DMA Mode  
The ECP or parallel port FIFOs may also be  
operated using interrupt driven programmed I/O.  
Software can determine the writeIntrThreshold,  
readIntrThreshold, and FIFO depth by accessing  
the FIFO in Test Mode.  
DMA may be disabled in the middle of a transfer  
by first disabling the host DMA controller. Then  
setting serviceIntr to 1, followed by setting  
dmaEn to 0, and waiting for the FIFO to  
become empty or full. Restarting the DMA is  
accomplished by enabling DMA in the host,  
setting dmaEn to 1, followed by setting  
serviceIntr to 0.  
Programmed I/O transfers are to the ecpDFifo  
at 400H and ecpAFifo at 000H or from the  
ecpDFifo located at 400H, or to/from the tFifo at  
400H. To use the programmed I/O transfers,  
the host first sets up the direction and state, sets  
dmaEn to 0 and serviceIntr to 0.  
The ECP requests programmed I/O transfers  
from the host by activating the PINTR pin. The  
programmed I/O will empty or fill the FIFO using  
the appropriate direction and mode.  
DMA Mode - Transfers from the FIFO to the  
Host  
(Note: In the reverse mode, the peripheral may  
not continue to fill the FIFO if it runs out of data  
to transfer, even if the chip continues to request  
more data from the peripheral.)  
Note: A threshold of 16 is equivalent to a  
threshold of 15. These two cases are treated  
the same.  
The ECP activates the PDRQ pin whenever  
there is data in the FIFO. The DMA controller  
must respond to the request by reading data  
from the FIFO. The ECP will deactivate the  
PDRQ pin when the FIFO becomes empty or  
when the TC becomes true (qualified by  
nPDACK), indicating that no more data is  
required. PDRQ goes inactive after nPDACK  
goes active for the last byte of a data transfer  
(or on the active edge of nIOR, on the last byte,  
if no edge is present on nPDACK). If PDRQ  
goes inactive due to the FIFO going empty,  
Programmed I/O - Transfers from the FIFO to  
the Host  
In the reverse direction an interrupt occurs when  
serviceIntr is 0 and readIntrThreshold bytes  
are available in the FIFO. If at this time the  
FIFO is full it can be emptied completely in a  
single burst, otherwise readIntrThreshold bytes  
may be read from the FIFO in a single burst.  
readIntrThreshold =(16-<threshold>) data bytes  
in FIFO  
105  
An interrupt is generated when serviceIntr is 0  
and the number of bytes in the FIFO is greater  
than or equal to (16-<threshold>). (If the  
the FIFO is empty it can be filled with a single  
burst before the empty bit needs to be re-read.  
Otherwise  
it  
may  
be  
filled  
with  
threshold  
=
12, then the interrupt is set  
writeIntrThreshold bytes.  
whenever there are 4-16 bytes in the FIFO.) The  
PINT pin can be used for interrupt-driven  
systems. The host must respond to the request  
by reading data from the FIFO. This process is  
repeated until the last byte is transferred out of  
the FIFO. If at this time the FIFO is full, it can  
writeIntrThreshold =  
(16-<threshold>) free  
bytes in FIFO  
An interrupt is generated when serviceIntr is 0  
and the number of bytes in the FIFO is less than  
or equal to <threshold>. (If the threshold = 12,  
then the interrupt is set whenever there are 12 or  
less bytes of data in the FIFO.) The PINT pin  
can be used for interrupt-driven systems. The  
host must respond to the request by writing data  
to the FIFO. If at this time the FIFO is empty, it  
can be completely filled in a single burst,  
otherwise a minimum of (16-<threshold>) bytes  
may be written to the FIFO in a single burst.  
This process is repeated until the last byte is  
transferred into the FIFO.  
be completely emptied in  
a single burst,  
otherwise a minimum of (16-<threshold>) bytes  
may be read from the FIFO in a single burst.  
Programmed I/O - Transfers from the Host to  
the FIFO  
In the forward direction an interrupt occurs when  
serviceIntr is 0 and there are writeIntrThreshold  
or more bytes free in the FIFO. At this time if  
106  
PARALLEL PORT FLOPPY DISK CONTROLLER  
The following parallel port pins are read as  
In this mode, the Floppy Disk Control signals  
are available on the parallel port pins. When  
this mode is selected, the parallel port is not  
available. There are two modes of operation,  
PPFD1 and PPFD2. These modes can be  
selected in the Parallel Port Mode Register, as  
defined in the Parallel Port Mode Register,  
Logical Device 3, at 0xF1. PPFD1 has only  
drive 1 on the parallel port pins; PPFD2 has  
drive 0 and 1 on the parallel port pins.  
follows by a read of the parallel port register:  
1. Data Register (read) = last Data Register  
(write)  
2. Control Register read as "cable not  
connected" STROBE, AUTOFD and SLC =  
0 and nINIT =1  
3. Status Register reads: nBUSY = 0, PE = 0,  
SLCT = 0, nACK = 1, nERR = 1.  
The following FDC pins are all in the high  
impedence state when the PPFDC is actually  
selected by the drive select register:  
When the PPFDC is selected the following pins  
are set as follows:  
1. nPDACK: high-Z  
2. PDRQ: not ECP = high-Z, ECP & dmaEn =  
0, ECP & not dmaEn = high-Z  
3. PINTR: not active, this is hi-Z or Low  
depending on settings.  
1. nWDATA, DENSEL, nHDSEL, nWGATE,  
nDIR, nSTEP, nDS1, nDS0, nMTR0,  
nMTR1.  
2. If PPFDx is selected, then the parallel port  
can not be used as a parallel port until  
"Normal" mode is selected.  
Note: nPDACK, PDRQ and PINTR refer to the  
nDACK, DRQ and IRQ chosen for the parallel  
port.  
The FDC signals are muxed onto the Parallel  
Port pins as shown in Table 44.  
107  
Table 44 - FDC Parallel Port Pins  
CONNECTOR  
PIN #  
CHIP PIN # SPP MODE PIN DIRECTION FDC MODE PIN DIRECTION  
1
83  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
80  
79  
78  
77  
82  
81  
66  
67  
nSTROBE  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I
(nDS0)  
nINDEX  
nTRK0  
I/(O) Note1  
2
3
PD0  
I
PD1  
I
4
PD2  
nWP  
I
5
PD3  
nRDATA  
nDSKCHG  
nMEDIA_ID0  
(nMTR0)  
MEDIA_ID1  
nDS1  
I
6
PD4  
I
7
PD5  
I
8
PD6  
I/(O) Note1  
9
PD7  
I
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
nACK  
BUSY  
PE  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
nMTR1  
I
nWDATA  
nWGATE  
DRVDEN0  
nHDSEL  
nDIR  
SLCT  
nALF  
nERROR  
nINIT  
nSLCTIN  
I
I/O  
I
I/O  
I/O  
nSTEP  
Note 1: These pins are outputs in mode PPFD2, inputs in mode PPFD1.  
108  
AUTO POWER MANAGEMENT  
Power management capabilities are provided for  
DSR From Powerdown  
the following logical devices: floppy disk, UART  
1, UART 2 and the parallel port. For each  
logical device, two types of power management  
are provided; direct powerdown and auto  
powerdown.  
If DSR powerdown is used when the part is in  
auto powerdown, the DSR powerdown will  
override the auto powerdown. However, when  
the part is awakened from DSR powerdown, the  
auto powerdown will once again become  
effective.  
FDC Power Management  
Direct power management is controlled by  
CR22. Refer to CR22 for more information.  
Wake Up From Auto Powerdown  
If the part enters the powerdown state through  
the auto powerdown mode, then the part can be  
awakened by reset or by appropriate access to  
certain registers.  
Auto Power Management is enabled by CR23-  
B0. When set, this bit allows FDC to enter  
powerdown when all of the following conditions  
have been met:  
If a hardware or software reset is used then the  
part will go through the normal reset sequence.  
If the access is through the selected registers,  
then the FDC resumes operation as though it  
was never in powerdown. Besides activating the  
RESET pin or one of the software reset bits in  
the DOR or DSR, the following register  
accesses will wake up the part:  
1. The motor enable pins of register 3F2H are  
inactive (zero).  
2. The part must be idle; MSR=80H and INT =  
0 (INT may be high even if MSR = 80H due  
to polling interrupts).  
3. The head unload timer must have expired.  
1. Enabling any one of the motor enable bits  
in the DOR register (reading the DOR does  
not awaken the part).  
4. The Auto powerdown timer (10msec) must  
have timed out.  
An internal timer is initiated as soon as the auto  
powerdown command is enabled. The part is  
then powered down when all the conditions are  
met.  
2. A read from the MSR register.  
3. A read or write to the Data register.  
Once awake, the FDC will reinitiate the auto  
powerdown timer for 10 ms. The part will  
powerdown again when all the powerdown  
conditions are satisfied.  
Disabling the auto powerdown mode cancels the  
timer and holds the FDC block out of auto  
powerdown.  
109  
Register Behavior  
Pin Behavior  
Table 45 reiterates the AT and PS/2 (including  
Model 30) configuration registers available. It  
also shows the type of access permitted. In  
order to maintain software transparency, access  
to all the registers must be maintained. As Table  
45 shows, two sets of registers are distinguished  
based on whether their access results in the part  
remaining in powerdown state or exiting it.  
The FDC37C67x is specifically designed for  
portable PC systems in which power  
conservation is a primary concern. This makes  
the behavior of the pins during powerdown very  
important.  
The pins of the FDC37C67x can be divided into  
two major categories: system interface and  
floppy disk drive interface. The floppy disk drive  
pins are disabled so that no power will be drawn  
through the part as a result of any voltage  
applied to the pin within the part's power supply  
range. Most of the system interface pins are left  
active to monitor system accesses that may  
wake up the part.  
Access to all other registers is possible without  
awakening the part. These registers can be  
accessed during powerdown without changing  
the status of the part. A read from these  
registers will reflect the true status as shown in  
the register description in the FDC description. A  
write to the part will result in the part retaining  
the data and subsequently reflecting it when the  
System Interface Pins  
part awakens.  
Accessing the part during  
powerdown may cause an increase in the power  
consumption by the part. The part will revert  
back to its low power mode when the access  
has been completed.  
Table 44 gives the state of the system interface  
pins in the powerdown state. Pins unaffected by  
the powerdown are labeled "Unchanged". Input  
pins are "Disabled" to prevent them from  
causing currents internal to the FDC37C67x  
when they have indeterminate input values.  
110  
Table 45 - PC/AT and PS/2 Available Registers  
Base + Address Available Registers Access Permitted  
PC-AT PS/2 (Model 30)  
Access to these registers DOES NOT wake up the part  
00H  
01H  
02H  
03H  
04H  
06H  
07H  
07H  
----  
----  
SRA  
SRB  
R
R
DOR (1)  
---  
DOR (1)  
---  
R/W  
---  
W
DSR (1)  
---  
DSR (1)  
---  
---  
R
DIR  
DIR  
CCR  
CCR  
W
Access to these registers wakes up the part  
04H  
05H  
MSR  
Data  
MSR  
Data  
R
R/W  
Note 1: Writing to the DOR or DSR does not wake up the part, however, writing any of the  
motor enable bits or doing a software reset (via DOR or DSR reset bits) will wake up the part  
Table 46 - State of System Pins in Auto Powerdown  
System Pins  
State in Auto Powerdown  
Input Pins  
nIOR  
nIOW  
Unchanged  
Unchanged  
Unchanged  
Unchanged  
Unchanged  
Unchanged  
Unchanged  
SA[0:9]  
SD[0:7]  
RESET_DRV  
DACKx  
TC  
Output Pins  
IRQx  
SD[0:7]  
DRQx  
Unchanged (low)  
Unchanged  
Unchanged (low)  
111  
FDD Interface Pins  
Pins used for local logic control or part  
programming are unaffected. Table 47 depicts  
the state of the floppy disk drive interface pins in  
the powerdown state.  
All pins in the FDD interface which can be  
connected directly to the floppy disk drive itself  
are either DISABLED or TRISTATED.  
Table 47 - State of Floppy Disk Drive Interface Pins in Powerdown  
FDD Pins  
State in Auto Powerdown  
Input Pins  
nRDATA  
nWPROT  
nTR0  
Input  
Input  
Input  
Input  
Input  
nINDEX  
nDSKCHG  
Output Pins  
nMTR[0:1]  
nDS[0:1]  
nDIR  
Tristated  
Tristated  
Active  
nSTEP  
Active  
nWDATA  
nWGATE  
nHDSEL  
DRVDEN[0:1]  
Tristated  
Tristated  
Active  
Active  
112  
UART Power Management  
Parallel Port  
Direct power management is controlled by  
CR22. Refer to CR22 for more information.  
Direct power management is controlled by  
CR22. Refer to CR22 for more information.  
Auto Power Management is enabled by CR23-  
B4 and B5. When set, these bits allow the  
following auto power management operations:  
Auto Power Management is enabled by CR23-  
B3. When set, this bit allows the ECP or EPP  
logical parallel port blocks to be placed into  
powerdown when not being used.  
1. The transmitter enters auto powerdown  
when the transmit buffer and shift register  
are empty.  
The EPP logic is in powerdown under any of the  
following conditions:  
2. The receiver enters powerdown when the  
following conditions are all met:  
1. EPP is not enabled in the configuration  
registers.  
A. Receive FIFO is empty  
B. The receiver is waiting for a start bit.  
2. EPP is not selected through ecr while in  
ECP mode.  
Note:  
While in powerdown the Ring Indicator  
interrupt is still valid and transitions  
when the RI input changes.  
The ECP logic is in powerdown under any of the  
following conditions:  
1. ECP is not enabled in the configuration  
registers.  
Exit Auto Powerdown  
2
SPP, PS/2 Parallel port or EPP mode is  
selected through ecr while in ECP mode.  
The transmitter exits powerdown on a write to  
the XMIT buffer.  
The receiver exits auto  
powerdown when RXDx changes state.  
Exit Auto Powerdown  
The parallel port logic can change powerdown  
modes when the ECP mode is changed through  
the ecr register or when the parallel port mode is  
changed through the configuration registers.  
113  
SERIAL IRQ  
The SMI is enabled onto the SMI frame of the Serial IRQ via bit 6 of SMI Enable Register 2 and onto  
the SMI pin via bit 7 of the SMI Enable Register 2.  
SERIAL INTERRUPTS  
The FDC37C67x will support the serial interrupt to transmit interrupt information to the host system.  
The serial interrupt scheme adheres to the Serial IRQ Specification for PCI Systems, Version 6.0.  
Timing Diagrams For IRQSER Cycle  
PCICLK = 33Mhz_IN pin  
IRQSER = SIRQ pin  
A) Start Frame timing with source sampled a low pulse on IRQ1  
START FRAME  
IRQ0 FRAME IRQ1 FRAME IRQ2 FRAME  
SL  
or  
H
R
T
S
R
T
S
R
T
S
R
T
H
PCICLK  
START1  
IRQSER  
IRQ1 Host Controller  
None  
IRQ1  
None  
Drive Source  
H=Host Control  
R=Recovery  
SL=Slave Control  
T=Turn-around  
S=Sample  
1) Start Frame pulse can be 4-8 clocks wide.  
114  
B) Stop Frame Timing with Host using 17 IRQSER sampling period  
IRQ14  
FRAME  
R
IRQ15  
FRAME  
R
IOCHCK#  
FRAME  
STOP FRAME  
NEXT CYCLE  
START3  
I 2  
S
T
S
T
S
R
T
H
R
T
PCICLK  
IRQSER  
Driver  
STOP1  
None  
IRQ15  
None  
Host Controller  
H=Host Control  
R=Recovery  
I= Idle.  
T=Turn-around  
S=Sample  
1)  
2)  
3)  
Stop pulse is 2 clocks wide for Quiet mode, 3 clocks wide for Continuous mode.  
There may be none, one or more Idle states during the Stop Frame.  
The next IRQSER cycle’s Start Frame pulse may or may not start immediately  
after the turn-around clock of the Stop Frame.  
115  
the IRQSER or the Host Controller can operate  
IRQSER in a continuous mode by initiating a  
Start Frame at the end of every Stop Frame.  
IRQSER Cycle Control  
There are two modes of operation for the  
IRQSER Start Frame.  
An IRQSER mode transition can only occur  
during the Stop Frame. Upon reset, IRQSER  
bus is defaulted to Continuous mode,  
therefore only the Host controller can initiate  
1) Quiet (Active) Mode : Any device may  
initiate a Start Frame by driving the IRQSER low  
for one clock, while the IRQSER is Idle. After  
driving low for one clock the IRQSER must  
immediately be tri-stated without at any time  
driving high. A Start Frame may not be initiated  
while the IRQSER is Active. The IRQSER is  
Idle between Stop and Start Frames. The  
IRQSER is Active between Start and Stop  
Frames. This mode of operation allows the  
IRQSER to be Idle when there are no IRQ/Data  
transitions which should be most of the time.  
the first Start Frame.  
Slaves must  
continuously sample the Stop Frames pulse  
width to determine the next IRQSER Cycle’s  
mode.  
IRQSER Data Frame  
Once a Start Frame has been initiated, the  
FDC37C67x will watch for the rising edge of the  
Start Pulse and start counting IRQ/Data Frames  
from there. Each IRQ/Data Frame is three  
clocks: Sample phase, Recovery phase, and  
Turn-around phase. During the Sample phase  
the FDC37C67x must drive the IRQSER (SIRQ  
pin) low, if and only if, its last detected IRQ/Data  
value was low. If its detected IRQ/Data value is  
high, IRQSER must be left tri-stated. During the  
Recovery phase the FDC37C67x must drive the  
SERIRQ high, if and only if, it had driven the  
IRQSER low during the previous Sample Phase.  
During the Turn-around Phase the FDC37C67x  
must tri-state the SERIRQ. The FDC37C67x will  
drive the IRQSER line low at the appropriate  
sample point if its associated IRQ/Data line is  
low, regardless of which device initiated the  
Start Frame.  
Once a Start Frame has been initiated the Host  
Controller will take over driving the IRQSER low  
in the next clock and will continue driving the  
IRQSER low for a programmable period of three  
to seven clocks. This makes a total low pulse  
width of four to eight clocks. Finally, the Host  
Controller will drive the IRQSER back high for  
one clock, then tri-state.  
Any IRQSER Device (i.e., The FDC37C67x)  
which detects any transition on an IRQ/Data line  
for which it is responsible must initiate a Start  
Frame in order to update the Host Controller  
unless the IRQSER is already in an IRQSER  
Cycle and the IRQ/Data transition can be  
delivered in that IRQSER Cycle.  
The Sample Phase for each IRQ/Data follows  
the low to high transition of the Start Frame  
pulse by a number of clocks equal to the  
IRQ/Data Frame times three, minus one. (e.g.  
The IRQ5 Sample clock is the sixth IRQ/Data  
Frame, (6 x 3) - 1 = 17th clock after the rising  
edge of the Start Pulse).  
2) Continuous (Idle) Mode: Only the Host  
controller can initiate a Start Frame to update  
IRQ/Data line information. All other IRQSER  
agents become passive and may not initiate a  
Start Frame. IRQSER will be driven low for four  
to eight clocks by Host Controller. This mode  
has two functions. It can be used to stop or idle  
116  
IRQSER Sampling Periods  
IRQSER PERIOD  
SIGNAL SAMPLED  
Not Used  
IRQ1  
# OF CLOCKS PAST START  
1
2
2
5
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
nSMI/IRQ2  
IRQ3  
8
11  
14  
17  
20  
23  
26  
29  
32  
35  
38  
41  
44  
47  
IRQ4  
IRQ5  
IRQ6  
IRQ7  
IRQ8  
IRQ9  
IRQ10  
IRQ11  
IRQ12  
IRQ13  
IRQ14  
IRQ15  
The SIRQ data frame will now support IRQ2 from a logical device, previously IRQSER Period 3 was  
reserved for use by the System Management Interrupt (nSMI). When using Period 3 for IRQ2 the user  
should mask off the SMI via the SMI Enable Register. Likewise, when using Period 3 for nSMI the  
user should not configure any logical devices as using IRQ2.  
IRQSER Period 14 is used to transfer IRQ13. Logical devices 0 (FDC), 3 (Par Port), 4 (Ser Port 1), 5  
(Ser Port 2), 6 (RTC), and 7 (KBD) shall have IRQ13 as a choice for their primary interrupt.  
117  
followed. This could cause a system fault. The  
host interrupt controller is responsible for  
ensuring that these latency issues are mitigated.  
The recommended solution is to delay EOIs and  
ISR Reads to the interrupt controller by the  
same amount as the IRQSER Cycle latency in  
order to ensure that these events do not occur  
out of order.  
Stop Cycle Control  
Once all IRQ/Data Frames have completed the  
Host Controller will terminate IRQSER activity  
by initiating a Stop Frame. Only the Host  
Controller can initiate the Stop Frame. A Stop  
Frame is indicated when the IRQSER is low for  
two or three clocks. If the Stop Frame’s low  
time is two clocks then the next IRQSER Cycle’s  
sampled mode is the Quiet mode; and any  
IRQSER device may initiate a Start Frame in  
the second clock or more after the rising edge  
of the Stop Frame’s pulse. If the Stop Frame’s  
low time is three clocks then the next IRQSER  
Cycle’s sampled mode is the Continuos mode;  
and only the Host Controller may initiate a Start  
Frame in the second clock or more after the  
rising edge of the Stop Frame’s pulse.  
AC/DC Specification Issue  
All IRQSER agents must drive  
/ sample  
IRQSER synchronously related to the rising  
edge of PCI bus clock. IRQSER (SIRQ) pin  
uses the electrical specification of PCI bus.  
Electrical parameters will follow PCI spec.  
section 4, sustained tri-state.  
Reset and Initialization  
Latency  
The IRQSER bus uses RESET_DRV as its reset  
signal. The IRQSER pin is tri-stated by all  
agents while RESET_DRV is active. With reset,  
IRQSER Slaves are put into the (continuous)  
IDLE mode. The Host Controller is responsible  
for starting the initial IRQSER Cycle to collect  
system’s IRQ/Data default values. The system  
then follows with the Continuous/Quiet mode  
protocol (Stop Frame pulse width) for  
subsequent IRQSER Cycles. It is Host  
Controller’s responsibility to provide the default  
values to 8259’s and other system logic before  
the first IRQSER Cycle is performed. For  
IRQSER system suspend, insertion, or removal  
application, the Host controller should be  
programmed into Continuous (IDLE) mode first.  
This is to guarantee IRQSER bus is in IDLE  
state before the system configuration changes.  
Latency for IRQ/Data updates over the IRQSER  
bus in bridge-less systems with the minimum  
IRQ/Data Frames of seventeen, will range up to  
96 clocks (3.84mS with a 25MHz PCI Bus or  
2.88uS with a 33MHz PCI Bus). If one or more  
PCI to PCI Bridge is added to a system, the  
latency for IRQ/Data updates from the  
secondary or tertiary buses will be a few clocks  
longer  
for  
synchronous  
buses,  
and  
approximately double for asynchronous buses.  
EOI/ISR Read Latency  
Any serialized IRQ scheme has a potential  
implementation issue related to IRQ latency.  
IRQ latency could cause an EOI or ISR Read to  
precede an IRQ transition that it should have  
118  
GP INDEX REGISTERS  
The Watchdog Timer Control, SMI Enable and  
To access these registers when in normal (run)  
mode, the host should perform an IOW of the  
Register Index to the GP Index register (at  
0xEX) to select the Register and then read or  
write the Data register (at Index+1) to access  
the register.  
SMI Status Registers can be accessed by the  
host when the chip is in the normal run mode if  
CR03 Bit[7]=1. The host uses GP Index and  
Data register to access these registers. The  
Power on default GP Index and Data registers  
are 0xEA and 0xEB respectively. In  
configuration mode the GP Index address may  
be programmed to reside on addresses 0xE0,  
0xE2, 0xE4 or 0xEA. The GP Data address is  
automatically set to the Index address + 1.  
Upon exiting the configuration mode the new GP  
Index and Data registers are used to access  
registers WDT_CTRL, SMI Enable and SMI  
Status Registers.  
The WDT_CTRL, SMI Enable and SMI Status  
registers can also be accessed by the host when  
in the configuration state through Logical Device  
8.  
Table 47A - GP Index and Data Register  
REGISTER  
GP Index  
GP Data  
ADDRESS (R/W)  
NORMAL (RUN) MODE  
0xE0, E2, E4, EA  
Index address + 1  
0x01-0x0F  
Access to Watchdog Timer  
Control, SMI Enable and  
SMI Status Registers (see  
Table 47B)  
119  
Table 47B - Index and Data Register Normal (Run) Mode  
INDEX  
NORMAL (RUN) MODE  
0x01  
0x02  
0x03  
0x04  
0x05  
0x06  
0x07  
0x08  
0x09  
0x0A  
0x0B  
0x0C  
0x0D  
0x0E  
0x0F  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Access to Watchdog Timer Control (L8 - CRF4)  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Access to SMI Enable Register 1 (L8-CRB4)  
Access to SMI Enable Register 2 (L8-CRB5)  
Access to SMI Status Register 1 (L8-CRB6)  
Access to SMI Status Register 2 (L8-CRB7)  
Note 1: These registers can also be accessed through the configuration registers at L8 -  
CRxx shown in the table above.  
120  
WATCH DOG TIMER  
The FDC37C67x contains a Watch Dog Timer  
There are three system events which can reset  
the WDT, these are a Keyboard Interrupt, a  
Mouse Interrupt, or I/O reads/writes to address  
0x201 (the internal or an external Joystick Port).  
The effect on the WDT for each of these system  
events may be individually enabled or disabled  
through bits in the WDT_CFG configuration  
register. When a system event is enabled  
through the WDT_CFG register, the occurrence  
of that event will cause the WDT to reload the  
value stored in WDT_VAL and reset the WDT  
time-out status bit if set. If all three system  
events are disabled the WDT will inevitably time  
out.  
(WDT). The Watch Dog Time-out status bit may  
be mapped to an interrupt through the  
WDT_CFG Configuration Register.  
The FDC37C67x's WDT has a programmable  
time-out ranging from 1 to 255 minutes with one  
minute resolution, or 1 to 255 seconds with 1  
second resolution.  
The units of the WDT  
timeout value are selected via bit[7] of the  
WDT_TIMEOUT register (LD8:CRF1.7). The  
WDT time-out value is set through the  
WDT_VAL Configuration register. Setting the  
WDT_VAL register to 0x00 disables the WDT  
function (this is its power on default). Setting  
the WDT_VAL to any other non-zero value will  
cause the WDT to reload and begin counting  
down from the value loaded. When the WDT  
count value reaches zero the counter stops and  
sets the Watchdog time-out status bit in the  
The Watch Dog Timer may be configured to  
generate an interrupt on the rising edge of the  
Time-out status bit. The WDT interrupt is  
mapped to an interrupt channel through the  
WDT_CFG Configuration Register.  
When  
WDT_CTRL Configuration Register.  
Note:  
mapped to an interrupt the interrupt request pin  
reflects the value of the WDT time-out status bit.  
Regardless of the current state of the WDT, the  
WDT time-out status bit can be directly set or  
cleared by the Host CPU.  
The host may force a Watch Dog time-out to  
occur by writing a "1" to bit 2 of the WDT_CTRL  
(Force WD Time-out) Configuration Register.  
Writing a "1" to this bit forces the WDT count  
value to zero and sets bit 0 of the WDT_CTRL  
(Watch Dog Status). Bit 2 of the WDT_CTRL is  
self-clearing.  
121  
8042 KEYBOARD CONTROLLER DESCRIPTION  
The FDC37C67x is a Super I/O and Universal  
Keyboard Controller that is designed for  
intelligent keyboard management in desktop  
computer applications. The Super I/O supports  
a Floppy Disk Controller, two 16550 type serial  
ports one ECP/EPP Parallel Port.  
The Universal Keyboard Controller uses an  
8042 microcontroller CPU core. This section  
concentrates on the FDC37C67x enhancements  
to the 8042. For general information about the  
8042, refer to the "Hardware Description of the  
8042" in the 8-Bit Embedded Controller Hand-  
book.  
8042A  
LS05  
P27  
P10  
KDAT  
KCLK  
MCLK  
MDAT  
P26  
TST0  
P23  
TST1  
P22  
P11  
Keyboard and Mouse Interface  
KIRQ is the Keyboard IRQ  
MIRQ is the Mouse IRQ  
Port 21 is used to create a GATEA20 signal from the FDC37C67x.  
122  
and the Status register, Input Data register, and  
Output Data register. Table 48 shows how the  
KEYBOARD ISA INTERFACE  
interface decodes the control signals.  
addition to the above signals, the host interface  
includes keyboard and mouse IRQs.  
In  
The FDC37C67x ISA interface is functionally  
compatible with the 8042 style host interface. It  
consists of the D0-7 data bus; the nIOR, nIOW  
Table 48 - ISA I/O Address Map  
ISA ADDRESS  
nIOW  
nIOR  
BLOCK  
KDATA  
KDATA  
KDCTL  
KDCTL  
FUNCTION (NOTE 1)  
Keyboard Data Write (C/D=0)  
Keyboard Data Read  
0x60  
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0x64  
Keyboard Command Write (C/D=1)  
Keyboard Status Read  
Note 1: These registers consist of three separate 8 bit registers. Status, Data/Command Write and  
Data Read.  
Keyboard Data Write  
Keyboard Command Write  
This is an 8 bit write only register. When  
written, the C/D status bit of the status register  
is cleared to zero and the IBF bit is set.  
This is an 8 bit write only register. When  
written, the C/D status bit of the status register  
is set to one and the IBF bit is set.  
Keyboard Data Read  
Keyboard Status Read  
This is an 8 bit read only register. If enabled by  
"ENABLE FLAGS", when read, the KIRQ output  
is cleared and the OBF flag in the status register  
is cleared. If not enabled, the KIRQ and/or  
AUXOBF1 must be cleared in software.  
This is an 8 bit read only register. Refer to the  
description of the Status Register for more  
information.  
123  
CPU-to-Host Communication  
to this register automatically sets Bit 0 (OBF) in  
the Status register. See Table 49.  
The FDC37C67x CPU can write to the Output  
Data register  
via  
register DBB. A write  
Table 49 - Host Interface Flags  
8042 INSTRUCTION  
FLAG  
OUT DBB  
Set OBF, and, if enabled, the KIRQ output signal goes high  
Host-to-CPU Communication  
MIRQ  
The host system can send both commands and  
data to the Input Data register. The CPU  
differentiates between commands and data by  
reading the value of Bit 3 of the Status register.  
When bit 3 is "1", the CPU interprets the register  
contents as a command. When bit 3 is "0", the  
CPU interprets the register contents as data.  
During a host write operation, bit 3 is set to "1" if  
SA2 = 1 or reset to "0" if SA2 = 0.  
If "EN FLAGS" has been executed and P25 is  
set to a one:; IBF is inverted and gated onto  
MIRQ. The MIRQ signal can be connected to  
system interrupt to signify that the FDC37C67x  
CPU has read the DBB register.  
If "EN FLAGS” has not been executed, MIRQ is  
controlled by P25. Writing a zero to P25 forces  
MIRQ low, a high forces MIRQ high. (MIRQ is  
normally selected as IRQ12 for mouse support.)  
KIRQ  
If "EN FLAGS" has been executed and P24 is  
set to a one: the OBF flag is gated onto KIRQ.  
The KIRQ signal can be connected to system  
interrupt to signify that the FDC37C67x CPU  
has written to the output data register via "OUT  
DBB,A". If P24 is set to a zero, KIRQ is forced  
low. On power-up, after a valid RST pulse has  
been delivered to the device, KIRQ is reset to 0.  
KIRQ will normally reflects the status of writes  
"DBB". (KIRQ is normally selected as IRQ1 for  
keyboard support.)  
Gate A20  
A general purpose P21 is used as a software  
controlled Gate A20 or user defined output.  
EXTERNAL  
INTERFACE  
KEYBOARD  
AND  
MOUSE  
Industry-standard PC-AT-compatible keyboards  
employ a two-wire, bidirectional TTL interface  
for data transmission. Several sources also  
supply PS/2 mouse products that employ the  
same type of interface. To facilitate system  
expansion, the FDC37C67x provides four signal  
pins that may be used to implement this  
interface directly for an external keyboard and  
mouse.  
If "EN FLAGS” has not been executed: KIRQ  
can be controlled by writing to P24. Writing a  
zero to P24 forces KIRQ low; a high forces  
KIRQ high.  
124  
The FDC37C67x has four high-drive, open-drain  
output, bidirectional port pins that can be used for  
external serial interfaces, such as ISA external  
keyboard and PS/2-type mouse interfaces. They are  
KCLK, KDAT, MCLK, and MDAT. P26 is inverted and  
output as KCLK. The KCLK pin is connected to  
TEST0. P27 is inverted and output as KDAT. The  
KDAT pin is connected to P10. P23 is inverted and  
output as MCLK. The MCLK pin is connected to  
TEST1. P22 is inverted and output as MDAT. The  
MDAT pin is connected to P11. NOTE: External pull-  
ups may be required.  
Hard Power Down Mode  
This mode is entered by executing  
instruction. The oscillator is stopped by disabling the  
oscillator driver cell. When either RESET is  
driven active or a data byte is written to the DBBIN  
register by a master CPU, this mode will be exited  
(as above). However, as the oscillator cell will require  
an initialization time, either RESET must be held  
active for sufficient time to allow the oscillator to  
stabilise. Program execution will resume as above.  
a STOP  
INTERRUPTS  
KEYBOARD POWER MANAGEMENT  
The FDC37C67x provides the two 8042 interrupts.  
IBF and the Timer/Counter Overflow.  
The keyboard provides support for two power-saving  
modes: soft powerdown mode and hard powerdown  
mode. In soft powerdown mode, the clock to the ALU  
is stopped but the timer/counter and interrupts are still  
active. In hard power down mode the clock to the  
8042 is stopped.  
MEMORY CONFIGURATIONS  
The FDC37C67x provides 2K of on-chip ROM and  
256 bytes of on-chip RAM.  
Soft Power Down Mode  
Register Definitions  
This mode is entered by executing  
a HALT  
Host I/F Data Register  
instruction. The execution of program code is halted  
until either RESET is driven active or a data byte is  
written to the DBBIN register by a master CPU. If  
this mode is exited using the interrupt, and the IBF  
interrupt is enabled, then program execution resumes  
with a CALL to the interrupt routine, otherwise the  
next instruction is executed. If it is exited using  
RESET then a normal reset sequence is initiated and  
program execution starts from program memory  
location 0.  
The Input Data register and Output Data register are  
each 8 bits wide. A write to this 8 bit register will load  
the Keyboard Data Read Buffer, set the OBF flag and  
set the KIRQ output if enabled. A read of this register  
will read the data from the Keyboard Data or  
Command Write Buffer and clear the IBF flag. Refer  
to the KIRQ and Status register descriptions for more  
information.  
Host I/F Status Register  
The Status register is 8 bits wide. Table 50 shows  
the contents of the Status register.  
Table 50 - Status Register  
D4 D3 D2  
UD C/D UD  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D1  
D0  
UD  
UD  
UD  
IBF  
OBF  
125  
cleared.  
There is no output pin  
Status Register  
associated with this internal signal.  
This register is cleared on a reset. This register  
is read-only for the Host and read/write by the  
FDC37C67x CPU.  
OBF  
(Output Buffer Full)- This flag is set to  
whenever  
the  
FDC37C67x CPU  
write to the output data register (DBB).  
When the host system reads the output  
data register, this bit is automatically  
reset.  
UD  
Writable by FDC37C67x CPU. These  
bits are user-definable.  
C/D  
(Command Data)-This bit specifies  
whether the input data register contains  
data or a command (0 = data, 1 =  
EXTERNAL CLOCK SIGNAL  
command).  
During  
a
host  
The FDC37C67x Keyboard Controller clock  
source is a 12 MHz clock generated from a  
14.318 MHz clock. The reset pulse must last for  
at least 24 16 Mhz clock periods. The pulse-  
width requirement applies to both internally (Vcc  
POR) and externally generated reset signals. In  
powerdown mode, the external clock signal is  
not loaded by the chip.  
data/command write operation, this bit  
is set to "1" if SA2 = 1 or reset to "0" if  
SA2 = 0.  
IBF  
(Input Buffer Full)- This flag is set to 1  
whenever the host system writes data  
into the input data register. Setting this  
flag activates the FDC37C67x CPU's  
nIBF (MIRQ) interrupt if enabled. When  
the FDC37C67x CPU reads the input  
data register (DBB), this bit is  
automatically reset and the interrupt is  
DEFAULT RESET CONDITIONS  
The FDC37C67x has one source of reset: an  
external reset via the RESET_DRV pin. Refer to  
Table 51 for the effect of each type of reset on  
the internal registers.  
Table 51 - Resets  
DESCRIPTION  
KCLK  
HARDWARE RESET (RESET)  
Weak High  
Weak High  
Weak High  
Weak High  
N/A  
KDAT  
MCLK  
MDAT  
Host I/F Data Reg  
Host I/F Status Reg  
00H  
N/A: Not Applicable  
126  
has been enabled via bit 2 of the KRST_GA20  
Register (Logical Device 7, 0xF0) set to 1.  
GATEA20 AND KEYBOARD RESET  
The FDC37C67x provides two options for  
GateA20 and Keyboard Reset: 8042 Software  
Generated GateA20 and KRESET and Port 92  
Fast GateA20 and KRESET.  
This register is used to support the alternate  
reset (nALT_RST) and alternate A20 (ALT_A20)  
functions.  
PORT 92 FAST GATEA20 AND KEYBOARD  
RESET  
Name  
Port 92  
92h  
24h  
Read/Write  
8 bits  
Location  
Default Value  
Attribute  
Size  
Port 92 Register  
This port can only be read or written if Port 92  
Port 92 Register  
Bit  
7:6  
5
4
3
Function  
Reserved. Returns 00 when read.  
Reserved. Returns a 1 when read.  
Reserved. Returns a 0 when read.  
Reserved. Returns a 0 when read.  
Reserved. Returns a 1 when read.  
2
1
ALT_A20 Signal control. Writing a 0 to this bit causes the ALT_A20 signal to be  
driven low. Writing a 1 to this bit causes the ALT_A20 signal to be driven high.  
Alternate System Reset. This read/write bit provides an alternate system reset  
function. This function provides an alternate means to reset the system CPU to  
effect a mode switch from Protected Virtual Address Mode to the Real Address  
Mode. This provides a faster means of reset than is provided by the Keyboard  
controller. This bit is set to a 0 by a system reset. Writing a 1 to this bit will cause  
the nALT_RST signal to pulse acitive (low) for a minimum of 1 µs after a delay of  
500 ns. Before another nALT_RST pulse can be generated, this bit must be  
written back to a 0.  
0
nGATEA20  
8042  
ALT_A20  
System  
P21  
nA20M  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
127  
Bit 0 of Port 92, which generates the nALT_RST  
signal, is used to reset the CPU under program  
pulse can be generated, bit 0 must be set to 0  
either by a system reset of a write to Port 92.  
Upon reset, this signal is driven inactive high (bit  
0 in the Port 92 Register is set to 0).  
control.  
This signal is AND’ed together  
externally with the reset signal (nKBDRST) from  
the keyboard controller to provide a software  
means of resetting the CPU. This provides a  
faster means of reset than is provided by the  
keyboard controller. Writing a 1 to bit 0 in the  
Port 92 Register causes this signal to pulse low  
for a minimum of 6µs, after a delay of a  
minimum of 14µs. Before another nALT_RST  
If Port 92 is enabled, i.e., bit 2 of KRST_GA20 is  
set to 1, then a pulse is generated by writing a 1  
to bit 0 of the Port 92 Register and this pulse is  
AND’ed with the pulse generated from the 8042.  
This pulse is output on pin KRESET and its  
polarity is controlled by the GPI/O polarity  
configuration.  
14us  
6us  
8042  
P20  
KRST  
KBDRST  
KRST_GA20  
Bit 2  
P92  
nALT_RST  
Bit 0  
Pulse  
Gen  
Note: When Port 92 is disabled,  
writes are ignored and reads  
return undefined values.  
14us  
6us  
KRESET Generation  
128  
Bit 1 of Port 92, the ALT_A20 signal, is used to  
force nA20M to the CPU low for support of real  
as in a true 8042 part. Reference the 8042 spec  
for all timing. A port signal of 0 drives the  
output to 0. A port signal of 1 causes the port  
enable signal to drive the output to 1 within 20-  
30nsec. After several (# TBD) clocks, the port  
enable goes away and the internal 90µA pull-up  
maintains the output signal as 1.  
mode compatible software.  
This signal is  
externally OR’ed with the A20GATE signal from  
the keyboard controller and CPURST to control  
the nA20M input of the CPU. Writing a 0 to bit 1  
of the Port 92 Register forces ALT_A20 low.  
ALT_A20 low drives nA20M to the CPU low, if  
A20GATE from the keyboard controller is also  
low. Writing a 1 to bit 1 of the Port 92 Register  
forces ALT_A20 high. ALT_A20 high drives  
nA20M to the CPU high, regardless of the state  
of A20GATE from the keyboard controller. Upon  
reset, this signal is driven low.  
In 8042 mode, the pins can be programmed as  
open drain. When programmed in open drain  
mode, the port enables do not come into play. If  
the port signal is 0 the output will be 0. If the  
port signal is 1, the output tristates: an external  
pull-up can pull the pin high, and the pin can be  
shared i.e., P12 and nSMI can be externally tied  
together. In 8042 mode, the pins cannot be  
programmed as input nor inverted through the  
GP configuration registers.  
8042 P12 and P16 Functions  
8042 functions P12 and P16 are implemented  
129  
0ns  
250ns  
500ns  
CLK  
AEN  
nAEN  
64=I/O Addr  
n64  
nIOW  
nA  
DD1  
nDD1  
nCNTL  
nIOW'  
nIOW+n64  
AfterD1  
nAfterD1  
60=I/O Addr  
n60  
nIOW+n60=B  
nAfterD1+B  
D[1]  
GA20  
Gate A20 Turn-On Sequence Timing  
When writing to the command and data port  
with hardware speedup, the IOW timing shown  
in the figure titled “IOW Timing for Port 92” in  
the Timing Diagrams Section is used. This  
setup time is only required to be met when using  
hardware speedup; the data must be valid a  
minimum of 0 nsec from the leading edge of  
the write and held throughout the entire write  
cycle.  
130  
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT INTERRUPT (SMI)  
The FDC37C67x implements a group nSMI  
SMI Enable Registers  
output pin. The System Management Interrupt  
is a non-maskable interrupt with the highest  
priority level used for transparent power  
management. The nSMI group interrupt output  
consists of the enabled interrupts from each of  
the functional blocks in the chip. The interrupts  
are enabled onto the group nSMI output via the  
SMI Enable Registers 1 and 2. The nSMI output  
is then enabled onto the group nSMI output pin  
via bit[7] in the SMI Enable Register 2.  
SMI Enable Register 1  
(Configuration Register B4, Logical Device 8)  
This register is used to enable the different  
interrupt sources onto the group nSMI output.  
SMI Enable Register 2  
(Configuration Register B5, Logical Device 8)  
This register is used to enable additional  
interrupt sources onto the group nSMI output.  
This register is also used to enable the group  
nSMI output onto the nSMI Serial/Parallel IRQ  
pin and the routing of 8042 P12 internally to  
nSMI.  
The logic equation for the nSMI output is as  
follows:  
nSMI  
=
(EN_PINT and IRQ_PINT) or  
(EN_U2INT and IRQ_U2INT) or  
(EN_U1INT and IRQ_U1INT) or  
SMI Status Registers  
(EN_FINT  
(EN_WDT  
(EN_MINT  
(EN_KINT  
and  
and  
and  
and  
IRQ_FINT)  
IRQ_WDT)  
IRQ_MINT)  
IRQ_KINT)  
or  
or  
or  
or  
SMI Status Register 1  
(Configuration Register B6, Logical Device 8)  
This register is used to read the status of the  
SMI input events. Note: The status bit gets set  
whether or not the interrupt is enabled onto the  
group SMI output.  
(EN_IRINT and IRQ_IRINT)  
REGISTERS  
The following registers can be accessed when in  
configuration mode at Logical Device 8,  
Registers B4-B7 and when not in configuration  
they can be accessed through the Index and  
Data Register (refer to Table 47B).  
SMI Status Register 2  
(Configuration Register B7, Logical Device 8)  
131  
CONFIGURATION  
The Configuration of the FDC37C67x is very  
configuration ports to initialize the logical  
devices at POST. The INDEX and DATA ports  
are only valid when the FDC37C67x is in  
Configuration Mode.  
flexible and is based on the configuration  
architecture implemented in typical Plug-and-  
Play components. The FDC37C67x is designed  
for motherboard applications in which the  
resources required by their components are  
known. With its flexible resource allocation  
architecture, the FDC37C67x allows the BIOS to  
assign resources at POST.  
The SYSOPT pin is latched on the falling edge  
of the RESET_DRV or on Vcc Power On Reset  
to determine the configuration register's base  
address. The SYSOPT pin is used to select the  
CONFIG PORT's I/O address at power-up.  
Once powered up the configuration port base  
address can be changed through configuration  
registers CR26 and CR27. The SYSOPT pin  
is a hardware configuration pin which is  
shared with the nRTS1 signal on pin 87.  
During reset this pin is a weak active low signal  
which sinks 30µA. Note: All I/O addresses are  
qualified with AEN.  
SYSTEM ELEMENTS  
Primary Configuration Address Decoder  
After a hard reset (RESET_DRV pin asserted) or  
Vcc Power On Reset the FDC37C67x is in the  
Run Mode with all logical devices disabled. The  
logical devices may be configured through two  
standard Configuration I/O Ports (INDEX and  
DATA) by placing the FDC37C67x into  
Configuration Mode. The BIOS uses these  
The INDEX and DATA ports are effective only  
when the chip is in the Configuration State.  
SYSOPT= 0  
PORT NAME  
(Pull-down resistor)  
Refer to Note 1  
SYSOPT= 1  
(10K Pull-up resistor)  
0x0370  
TYPE  
Write  
CONFIG PORT (Note 2) 0x03F0  
INDEX PORT (Note 2)  
DATA PORT  
0x03F0  
0x0370  
Read/Write  
Read/Write  
INDEX PORT + 1  
Note 1:  
If using TTL RS232 drivers use 1K pull-down. If using CMOS RS232 drivers use  
10K pull-down.  
Note 2:  
The configuration port base address can be relocated through CR26 and CR27.  
Entering the Configuration State  
Exiting the Configuration State  
The device enters the Configuration State when  
the following Config Key is successfully written  
to the CONFIG PORT.  
The device exits the Configuration State when  
the following Config Key is successfully written  
to the CONFIG PORT.  
Config Key = < 0x55 >  
Config Key = < 0xAA>  
132  
CONFIGURATION SEQUENCE  
Exit Configuration Mode  
To program the configuration registers, the  
following sequence must be followed:  
1. Enter Configuration Mode  
To exit the Configuration State the system  
writes 0xAA to the CONFIG PORT. The chip  
returns to the RUN State.  
2. Configure the Configuration Registers  
3. Exit Configuration Mode.  
Note: Only two states are defined (Run and  
Configuration). In the Run State the chip will  
always be ready to enter the Configuration  
State.  
Enter Configuration Mode  
To  
place  
the  
chip  
into  
the  
Configuration State the Config Key is sent to  
the chip's CONFIG PORT. The config key  
consists of 0x55 written to the CONFIG PORT.  
Once the configuration key is received correctly  
the chip enters into the Configuration State  
(The auto Config ports are enabled).  
Programming Example  
The following is an example of a configuration  
program in Intel 8086 assembly language.  
;--------------------------------------------------.  
; ENTER CONFIGURATION MODE |  
;--------------------------------------------------'  
MOV  
MOV  
OUT  
DX,3F0H  
AX,055H  
DX,AL  
Configuration Mode  
The system sets the logical device information  
and activates desired logical devices through  
the INDEX and DATA ports. In configuration  
mode, the INDEX PORT is located at the  
CONFIG PORT address and the DATA PORT is  
at INDEX PORT address + 1.  
;--------------------------------------------------.  
; CONFIGURE REGISTER CRE0,  
; LOGICAL DEVICE 8  
|
|
;--------------------------------------------------'  
MOV  
MOV  
OUT  
MOV  
MOV  
OUT  
;
MOV  
MOV  
OUT  
MOV  
MOV  
OUT  
DX,3F0H  
AL,07H  
DX,AL ; Point to LD# Config Reg  
DX,3F1H  
AL, 08H  
The desired configuration registers are accessed  
in two steps:  
a. Write the index of the Logical Device  
Number Configuration Register (i.e., 0x07) to  
the INDEX PORT and then write the number  
of the desired logical device to the DATA  
PORT  
b. Write the address of the desired  
configuration register within the logical  
device to the INDEX PORT and then write or  
read the configuration register through the  
DATA PORT.  
DX,AL ; Point to Logical Device 8  
DX,3F0H  
AL,E0H  
DX,AL ; Point to CRE0  
DX,3F1H  
AL,02H  
DX,AL ; Update CRE0  
;-------------------------------------------------.  
; EXIT CONFIGURATION MODE  
;-------------------------------------------------'  
|
Note: If accessing the Global Configuration  
Registers, step (a) is not required.  
MOV  
MOV  
OUT  
DX,3F0H  
AX,0AAH  
DX,AL  
133  
Notes: 1. HARD RESET: RESET_DRV pin asserted  
2. SOFT RESET: Bit 0 of Configuration Control register set to one  
3. All host accesses are blocked for 500µs after Vcc POR (see Power-up Timing  
Diagram)  
Table 52 - Configuration Registers  
Vcc  
POR RESET  
GLOBAL CONFIGURATION REGISTERS  
SOFT  
INDEX  
TYPE  
HARD RESET  
CONFIGURATION REGISTER  
0x02  
0x03  
0x07  
0x20  
0x21  
0x22  
0x23  
0x24  
0x26  
W
0x00  
0x03  
0x00  
-
-
-
-
-
Config Control  
Index Address  
R/W  
R/W  
R
0x00 Logical Device Number  
Device ID - hard wired  
0x40  
Current Revision  
R
Device Rev - hard wired  
0x00 Power Control  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
-
-
-
-
0x00  
0x04  
-
-
-
Power Mgmt  
OSC  
Sysopt=0: 0xF0  
Sysopt=1: 0x70  
Sysopt=0: 0x03  
Sysopt=1: 0x03  
Configuration Port Address Byte 0  
0x27  
R/W  
-
-
Configuration Port Address Byte 1  
0x2B  
0x2C  
0x2D  
0x2E  
0x2F  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
-
-
-
-
-
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
-
-
-
-
-
TEST 4  
TEST 5  
TEST 1  
TEST 2  
TEST 3  
LOGICAL DEVICE 0 CONFIGURATION REGISTERS (FDD)  
0x30  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
-
-
0x00 Activate  
0x03,  
0xF0  
0x60,  
0x61  
0x03,  
0xF0  
Primary Base I/O Address  
0x70  
0x74  
0xF0  
0xF1  
0xF2  
0xF4  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0x06  
0x02  
0x0E  
0x00  
0xFF  
0x00  
-
-
-
-
-
-
0x06 Primary Interrupt Select  
0x02 DMA Channel Select  
-
-
-
-
FDD Mode Register  
FDD Option Register  
FDD Type Register  
FDD0  
134  
Table 52 - Configuration Registers  
Vcc SOFT  
POR RESET  
INDEX  
0xF5  
TYPE  
R/W  
HARD RESET  
CONFIGURATION REGISTER  
FDD1  
0x00  
-
-
LOGICAL DEVICE 1 CONFIGURATION REGISTERS (RESERVED)  
LOGICAL DEVICE 2 CONFIGURATION REGISTERS (RESERVED)  
LOGICAL DEVICE 3 CONFIGURATION REGISTERS (Parallel Port)  
0x30  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
-
-
0x00 Activate  
0x00,  
0x00  
0x60,  
0x61  
0x00,  
0x00  
Primary Base I/O Address  
0x70  
0x74  
0xF0  
0xF1  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
0x04  
0x3C  
0x00  
-
-
-
-
0x00 Primary Interrupt Select  
0x04 DMA Channel Select  
-
-
Parallel Port Mode Register  
Parallel Port Mode Register 2  
LOGICAL DEVICE 4 CONFIGURATION REGISTERS (Serial Port 1)  
0x30  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
-
-
0x00 Activate  
0x00,0  
x00  
0x60,  
0x61  
0x00,  
0x00  
Primary Base I/O Address  
0x70  
0xF0  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
0x00  
-
-
0x00 Primary Interrupt Select  
Serial Port 1 Mode Register  
-
LOGICAL DEVICE 5 CONFIGURATION REGISTERS (Serial Port 2)  
0x30  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
-
-
0x00 Activate  
0x00,  
0x00  
0x60,  
0x61  
0x00,  
0x00  
Primary Base I/O Address  
0x00,  
0x00  
0x62,  
0x63  
R/W  
0x00,  
0x00  
-
Fast IR Base I/O Address  
0x70  
0x74  
0xF0  
0xF1  
0xF2  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
0x04  
0x00  
0x02  
0x03  
-
-
-
-
-
0x00 Primary Interrupt Select  
0x04 DMA Channel Select  
-
-
-
Serial Port 2 Mode Register  
IR Options Register  
IR Half Duplex Timeout  
LOGICAL DEVICE 6 CONFIGURATION REGISTERS (RESERVED)  
LOGICAL DEVICE 7 CONFIGURATION REGISTERS (Keyboard)  
0x30  
R/W  
0x00  
-
0x00 Activate  
135  
Table 52 - Configuration Registers  
Vcc SOFT  
POR RESET  
INDEX  
0x70  
TYPE  
R/W  
HARD RESET  
CONFIGURATION REGISTER  
0x00 Primary Interrupt Select  
0x00 Second Interrupt Select  
KRESET and GateA20 Select  
0x00  
-
-
-
0x72  
0xF0  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
0x00  
LOGICAL DEVICE 8 CONFIGURATION REGISTERS (Aux I/O)  
0x30  
0xB4  
0xB5  
0xB6  
0xB7  
0xC0  
0xC1  
0xC2  
0xC3  
0xC4  
0xF1  
0xF2  
0xF3  
0xF4  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R
0x00  
-
0x00 Activate  
-
0x00  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SMI Enable Register 1  
-
0x00  
SMI Enable Register 2  
SMI Status Register 1  
SMI Status Register 2  
Pin Multiplex Controls  
Force Disk Change  
Floppy Data Rate Select Shadow  
UART1 FIFO Control Shadow  
UART2 FIFO Control Shadow  
WDT_TIME_OUT  
-
0x00  
-
0x00  
0x06  
-
0x03  
-
-
-
R
-
-
R
-
-
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/WNote1  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
-
-
-
WDT_VAL  
-
0x00  
-
WDT_CFG  
WDT_CTRL  
0xF6 :  
FB  
-
Reserved  
LOGICAL DEVICE 9 CONFIGURATION REGISTERS (RESERVED)  
Note1: This register contains some bits which are read or write only.  
136  
Chip Level (Global) Control/Configuration  
Registers[0x00-0x2F]  
The INDEX PORT is used to select  
a
The chip-level (global) registers lie in the  
address range [0x00-0x2F]. The design MUST  
use all 8 bits of the ADDRESS Port for register  
selection. All unimplemented registers and bits  
ignore writes and return zero when read.  
configuration register in the chip. The DATA  
PORT is then used to access the selected  
register. These registers are accessable only in  
the Configuration Mode.  
Table 53 - Chip Level Registers  
ADDRESS DESCRIPTION  
REGISTER  
STATE  
Chip (Global) Control Registers  
0x00 -  
0x01  
Reserved - Writes are ignored, reads return 0.  
Config Control  
0x02 W  
The hardware automatically clears this bit after the  
write, there is no need for software to clear the bits.  
Bit 0 = 1: Soft Reset. Refer to the "Configuration  
Registers" table for the soft reset value for each  
register.  
C
Default = 0x00  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Index Address  
0x03 R/W Bit[7]  
= 1  
Enable WDT_CTRL and SMI Enable and  
SMI Status Register access when not in  
configuration mode  
Default = 0x03  
= 0  
Disable WDT_CTRL and SMI Enable and  
SMI Status Register access when not in  
configuration mode (Default)  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Bits [6:2]  
Reserved - Writes are ignored, reads return 0.  
Bits[1:0]  
Sets GP index register address when in Run mode  
(not in Configuration Mode).  
= 11 0xEA (Default)  
= 10 0xE4  
= 01 0xE2  
= 00 0xE0  
0x04 - 0x06  
Reserved - Writes are ignored, reads return 0.  
137  
Table 53 - Chip Level Registers  
DESCRIPTION  
REGISTER  
ADDRESS  
STATE  
Logical Device #  
0x07 R/W A write to this register selects the current logical  
device. This allows access to the control and  
configuration registers for each logical device.  
Note: the Activate command operates only on the  
selected logical device.  
C
Default = 0x00  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Card Level  
Reserved  
0x08 - 0x1F  
Reserved - Writes are ignored, reads return 0.  
Chip Level, SMSC Defined  
Device ID  
0x20 R  
A
read only register which provides device  
C
C
C
identification. Bits[7:0] = 0x40 when read.  
Hard wired  
= 0x40  
Device Rev  
0x21 R  
A read only register which provides device revision  
information. Bits[7:0] = 0x01 when read.  
Hard wired  
= 0x01  
PowerControl  
0x22 R/W Bit[0] FDC Power  
Bit[1] Reserved  
Default = 0x00.  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv hardware  
signal  
Bit[2] Reserved  
Bit[3] Parallel Port Power  
Bit[4] Serial Port 1 Power  
Bit[5] Serial Port 2 Power  
Bit[6] Reserved  
Bit[7] Reserved (read as 0)  
= 0  
= 1  
Power off or disabled  
Power on or enabled  
Power Mgmt  
0x23 R/W Bit[0] FDC  
Bit[1] Reserved  
C
Default = 0x00.  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv hardware  
signal  
Bit[2] Reserved  
Bit[3] Parallel Port  
Bit[4] Serial Port 1  
Bit[5] Serial Port 2  
Bit[6:7] Reserved (read as 0)  
= 0  
= 1  
Intelligent Pwr Mgmt off  
Intelligent Pwr Mgmt on  
138  
Table 54 - Chip Level Registers  
DESCRIPTION  
REGISTER  
OSC  
ADDRESS  
STATE  
0x24 R/W  
C
Bit[0] Reserved  
Bit [1] PLL Control  
Default = 0x04, on  
Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv hardware  
signal.  
= 0  
= 1  
PLL is on (backward Compatible)  
PLL is off  
Bits[3:2] OSC  
= 01  
= 10  
= 00  
= 11  
Osc is on, BRG clock is on.  
Same as above (01) case.  
Osc is on, BRG Clock Enabled.  
Osc is off, BRG clock is disabled.  
Bit [5:4] Reserved, set to zero  
Bit [6] 16-Bit Address Qualification  
= 0  
= 1  
12-Bit Address Qualification  
16-Bit Address Qualification  
Bit[7] Reserved  
Chip Level  
Vendor Defined  
0x25  
0x26  
Reserved - Writes are ignored, reads return 0.  
Bit[7:1] Configuration Address Bits [7:1]  
Bit[0] = 0  
See Note 1  
Configuration  
Address Byte 0  
C
C
Default  
=0xF0 (Sysopt=0)  
=0x70 (Sysopt=1)  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Configuration  
Address Byte 1  
0x27  
0x28  
Bit[7:0] Configuration Address Bits [15:8]  
See Note 1  
Default = 0x03  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Default = 0x00  
on VCC POR and  
Hard Reset  
Bits[7:0] Reserved - Writes are ignored, reads  
return 0.  
Chip Level  
0x29 -0x2A Reserved - Writes are ignored, reads return 0.  
Vendor Defined  
TEST 4  
0x2B R/W Test Modes: Reserved for SMSC. Users should not  
write to this register, may produce undesired  
C
139  
Table 54 - Chip Level Registers  
REGISTER  
ADDRESS  
DESCRIPTION  
STATE  
results.  
Default = 0x00, on  
Vcc POR  
TEST 5  
0x2C R/W Test Modes: Reserved for SMSC. Users should not  
write to this register, may produce undesired  
results.  
C
C
Default = 0x00, on  
Vcc POR  
TEST 1  
0x2D R/W Test Modes: Reserved for SMSC. Users should not  
write to this register, may produce undesired  
results.  
Default = 0x00, on  
Vcc POR  
TEST 2  
0x2E R/W Test Modes: Reserved for SMSC. Users should not  
write to this register, may produce undesired  
results.  
C
C
Default = 0x00, on  
Vcc POR  
TEST 3  
0x2F R/W Test Modes: Reserved for SMSC. Users should not  
write to this register, may produce undesired  
results.  
Default = 0x00, on  
Vcc POR  
Note 1: To allow the selection of the configuration address to a user defined location, these  
Configuration Address Bytes are used. There is no restriction on the address chosen, except that A0  
is 0, that is, the address must be on an even byte boundary. As soon as both bytes are changed, the  
configuration space is moved to the specified location with no delay (Note: Write byte 0, then byte 1;  
writing CR27 changes the base address).  
The configuration address is only reset to its default address upon a Hard Reset or Vcc POR.  
Note: The default configuration address is either 3F0 or 370, as specified by the SYSOPT pin.  
This change affects SMSC Mode only.  
140  
each logical device and is selected with the  
Logical Device # Register (0x07).  
Logical  
Registers [0x30-0xFF]  
Device  
Configuration/Control  
The INDEX PORT is used to select a specific  
logical device register. These registers are then  
accessed through the DATA PORT.  
Used to access the registers that are assigned  
to each logical unit. This chip supports nine  
logical units and has nine sets of logical device  
registers. The six logical devices are Floppy,  
Parallel, Serial 1, Serial 2, Keyboard Controller,  
and Auxiliary_I/O. A separate set (bank) of  
control and configuration registers exists for  
The Logical Device registers are accessible only  
when the device is in the Configuration State.  
The logical register addresses are shown in the  
table below.  
Table 55 - Logical Device Registers  
LOGICAL DEVICE  
REGISTER  
ADDRESS  
DESCRIPTION  
STATE  
ActivateNote1  
(0x30)  
Bits[7:1] Reserved, set to zero.  
Bit[0]  
C
Default = 0x00  
= 1  
Activates the logical device currently  
selected through the Logical Device  
# register.  
Logical device currently selected is  
inactive  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
= 0  
Logical Device Control  
Logical Device Control  
Memory Base Address  
I/O Base Address  
(0x31-0x37) Reserved - Writes are ignored, reads return  
0.  
C
C
C
C
(0x38-0x3f) Vendor Defined - Reserved - Writes are  
ignored, reads return 0.  
(0x40-0x5F) Reserved - Writes are ignored, reads return  
0.  
(0x60-0x6F) Registers 0x60 and 0x61 set the base  
address for the device. If more than one  
(see Device Base I/O  
Address Table)  
0x60,2,... = base address is required, the second base  
addr[15:8]  
address is set by registers 0x62 and 0x63.  
Refer to Table 64 for the number of base  
address registers used by each device.  
Default = 0x00  
0x61,3,... =  
addr[7:0]  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Unused registers will ignore writes and return  
zero when read.  
141  
Table 55 - Logical Device Registers  
ADDRESS DESCRIPTION  
LOGICAL DEVICE  
REGISTER  
STATE  
Interrupt Select  
(0x70,0x72) 0x70 is implemented for each logical device.  
Refer to Interrupt Configuration Register  
description. Only the keyboard controller  
uses Interrupt Select register 0x72. Unused  
register (0x72) will ignore writes and return  
zero when read. Interrupts default to edge  
high (ISA compatible).  
C
Defaults :  
0x70 = 0x00,  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
0x72 = 0x00,  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
(0x71,0x73) Reserved - not implemented. These register  
locations ignore writes and return zero when  
read.  
DMA Channel Select  
(0x74,0x75) Only 0x74 is implemented for FDC, Serial  
C
Port 2 and Parallel port.  
0x75 is not  
Default = 0x04  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
implemented and ignores writes and returns  
zero when read. Refer to DMA Channel  
Configuration.  
32-Bit Memory Space  
Configuration  
(0x76-0xA8) Reserved - not implemented. These register  
locations ignore writes and return zero when  
read.  
Logical Device  
(0xA9-0xDF) Reserved - not implemented. These register  
locations ignore writes and return zero when  
read.  
C
C
C
Logical Device  
Configuration  
(0xE0-0xFE) Reserved - Vendor Defined (see SMSC  
defined  
Logical  
Device  
Configuration  
Registers).  
Reserved  
0xFF  
Reserved  
Note 1: A logical device will be active and powered up according to the following equation:  
DEVICE ON (ACTIVE) = (Activate Bit SET or Pwr/Control Bit SET).  
The Logical device's Activate Bit and its Pwr/Control Bit are linked such that setting  
or clearing one sets or clears the other. If the I/O Base Addr of the logical device is  
not within the Base I/O range as shown in the Logical Device I/O map, then read or  
write is not valid and is ignored.  
142  
Table 56 - I/O Base Address Configuration Register Description  
BASE I/O  
LOGICAL  
DEVICE  
NUMBER  
RANGE  
LOGICAL  
DEVICE  
FIXED  
REGISTER  
INDEX  
(NOTE3)  
BASE OFFSETS  
0x00  
FDC  
0x60,0x61  
[0x100:0x0FF8]  
+0 : SRA  
+1 : SRB  
(Note 4)  
ON 8 BYTE BOUNDARIES +2 : DOR  
+3 : TSR  
+4 : MSR/DSR  
+5 : FIFO  
+7 : DIR/CCR  
0x03  
Parallel  
Port  
0x60,0x61  
[0x100:0x0FFC]  
ON 4 BYTE BOUNDARIES +1 : Status  
+0 : Data|ecpAfifo  
(EPP Not supported)  
or  
+2 : Control  
+3 : EPP Address  
+4 : EPP Data 0  
[0x100:0x0FF8]  
ON 8 BYTE BOUNDARIES +5 : EPP Data 1  
(all modes supported, +6 : EPP Data 2  
EPP is only available when +7 : EPP Data 3  
the base address is on an 8- +400h : cfifo|ecpDfifo|tfifo  
byte boundary)  
|cnfgA  
+401h : cnfgB  
+402h : ecr  
0x04  
0x05  
Serial Port 0x60,0x61  
1
[0x100:0x0FF8]  
+0 : RB/TB|LSB div  
+1 : IER|MSB div  
ON 8 BYTE BOUNDARIES +2 : IIR/FCR  
+3 : LCR  
+4 : MSR  
+5 : LSR  
+6 : MSR  
+7 : SCR  
Serial Port 0x60,0x61  
2
[0x100:0x0FF8]  
+0 : RB/TB|LSB div  
+1 : IER|MSB div  
ON 8 BYTE BOUNDARIES +2 : IIR/FCR  
+3 : LCR  
+4 : MSR  
+5 : LSR  
+6 : MSR  
+7 : SCR  
+0 : Fast IR Registers  
+1 : Fast IR Registers  
0x62,0x63  
[0x100:0x0FF8]  
ON 8 BYTE BOUNDARIES  
143  
Table 56 - I/O Base Address Configuration Register Description  
BASE I/O  
LOGICAL  
DEVICE  
NUMBER  
RANGE  
LOGICAL  
DEVICE  
FIXED  
REGISTER  
INDEX  
(NOTE3)  
BASE OFFSETS  
+2 : Fast IR Registers  
+3 : Fast IR Registers  
+4 : Fast IR Registers  
+5 : Fast IR Registers  
+6 : Fast IR Registers  
+7 : Fast IR Registers  
0x06  
0x07  
Reserved  
KYBD  
Not Relocatable  
+0 : Data Register  
n/a  
Fixed Base Address: 60,64 +4 : Command/Status Reg.  
0x09  
Reserved  
Note 3: This chip uses ISA address bits [A11:A0] to decode the base address of each of its logical  
devices.  
Table 57 - Interrupt Select Configuration Register Description  
NAME  
Interrupt  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
0x70 (R/W)  
Bits[3:0] selects which interrupt level is used for  
C
Request Level  
Select 0  
Interrupt 0.  
0x00= no interrupt selected.  
0x01= IRQ1  
0x02= IRQ2/nSMI  
0x03= IRQ3  
0x04= IRQ4  
Default = 0x00  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
0x05= IRQ6  
0x06= IRQ7  
0x07= IRQ7  
0x08= IRQ8  
0x09= IRQ9  
0x0A= IRQ10  
0x0B= IRQ11  
0x0C= IRQ12  
0x0D= IRQ13  
0x0E= IRQ14  
0x0F= IRQ15  
Note: All interrupts are edge high (except ECP/EPP)  
Note: nSMI is active low  
144  
Note:  
An Interrupt is activated by setting the Interrupt Request Level Select 0 register to a non-zero  
value AND :  
for the FDC logical device by setting DMAEN, bit D3 of the Digital Output Register.  
for the PP logical device by setting IRQE, bit D4 of the Control Port and in addition  
for the PP logical device in ECP mode by clearing serviceIntr, bit D2 of the ecr.  
for the Serial Port logical device by setting any combination of bits D0-D3 in the IER  
and by setting the OUT2 bit in the UART's Modem Control (MCR) Register.  
for the RTC by (refer to the RTC section of this spec.)  
for the KYBD by (refer to the KYBD controller section of this spec.)  
IRQ pins must tri-state if not used/selected by any Logical Device. Refer to Note A.  
Note:  
Note: nSMI must be disabled to use IRQ2.  
Note:  
All IRQ’s are available in Serial IRQ mode. Only IRQ[3:7] and IRQ[10:12] are available in  
Parallel IRQ mode.  
Table 58 - DMA Channel Select Configuration Register Description  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
DMA Channel  
Select  
0x74 (R/W)  
Bits[2:0] select the DMA Channel.  
0x00= Reserved  
C
0x01= DMA1  
0x02= DMA2  
0x03= DMA3  
0x04-0x07= No DMA active  
Default = 0x04  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Note:  
A DMA channel is activated by setting the DMA Channel Select register to [0x01-0x03] AND :  
for the FDC logical device by setting DMAEN, bit D3 of the Digital Output Register.  
for the PP logical device in ECP mode by setting dmaEn, bit D3 of the ecr.  
for the UART 2 logical device, by setting the DMA Enable bit. Refer to the IRCC  
specification.  
Note:  
DMAREQ pins must tri-state if not used/selected by any Logical Device. Refer to Note A.  
145  
Note A. Logical Device IRQ and DMA Operation  
1.  
IRQ and DMA Enable and Disable: Any time the IRQ or DACK for a logical block is  
disabled by a register bit in that logical block, the IRQ and/or DACK must be disabled. This  
is in addition to the IRQ and DACK disabled by the Configuration Registers (active bit or  
address not valid).  
a.  
FDC: For the following cases, the IRQ and DACK used by the FDC are disabled (high  
impedance). Will not respond to the DREQ  
Digital Output Register (Base+2) bit D3 (DMAEN) set to "0".  
The FDC is in power down (disabled).  
b.  
c.  
Serial Port 1 and 2:  
Modem Control Register (MCR) Bit D2 (OUT2) - When OUT2 is a logic "0", the serial port  
interrupt is forced to a high impedance state - disabled.  
Parallel Port:  
I.  
disabled (high impedance).  
ii. ECP Mode:  
SPP and EPP modes: Control Port (Base+2) bit D4 (IRQE) set to "0", IRQ is  
(1)  
(2)  
(DMA) dmaEn from ecr register. See table.  
IRQ - See table.  
MODE  
IRQ PIN  
PDREQ PIN  
(FROM ECR REGISTER)  
CONTROLLED BY CONTROLLED BY  
000  
001  
010  
011  
100  
101  
110  
111  
PRINTER  
SPP  
IRQE  
IRQE  
(on)  
dmaEn  
dmaEn  
dmaEn  
dmaEn  
dmaEn  
dmaEn  
dmaEn  
dmaEn  
FIFO  
ECP  
(on)  
EPP  
IRQE  
IRQE  
(on)  
RES  
TEST  
CONFIG  
IRQE  
d.  
Keyboard Controller: Refer to the KBD section of this spec.  
146  
Registers reset to their default values only on  
hard resets generated by Vcc or VTR POR (as  
shown) or the RESET_DRV signal. These  
registers are not affected by soft resets.  
SMSC Defined Logical Device Configuration  
Registers  
The  
SMSC  
Specific  
Logical  
Device  
Configuration  
Table 59 - Floppy Disk Controller, Logical Device 0 [Logical Device Number = 0x00]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
FDD Mode Register  
0xF0 R/W Bit[0] Floppy Mode  
C
= 0  
= 1  
Normal Floppy Mode (default)  
Enhanced Floppy Mode 2 (OS2)  
Default = 0x0E  
Bit[1] FDC DMA Mode  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
= 0  
= 1  
Burst Mode is enabled  
Non-Burst Mode (default)  
Bit[3:2] Interface Mode  
= 11  
= 10  
= 01  
= 00  
AT Mode (default)  
(Reserved)  
PS/2  
Model 30  
Bit[4] Swap Drives 0,1 Mode  
= 0  
= 1  
No swap (default)  
Drive and Motor sel 0 and 1 are  
swapped.  
Bit[5] Reserved, set to zero  
Bit[6] FDC Output Type Control  
= 0  
= 1  
FDC outputs are OD24 open drain (default)  
FDC outputs are O24 push-pull  
Bit[7] FDC Output Control  
= 0  
= 1  
FDC outputs active (default)  
FDC outputs tri-stated  
Note: Bits 6 & 7 do not affect the parallel port FDC  
pins.  
FDD Option  
Register  
0xF1 R/W Bits[1:0] Reserved, set to zero  
Bits[3:2] Density Select  
C
= 00  
= 01  
= 10  
= 11  
Normal (default)  
Default = 0x00  
Normal (reserved for users)  
1 (forced to logic "1")  
0 (forced to logic "0")  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Bit[4] Media ID 0 Polarity  
= 0: Don’t invert (default)  
= 1: Invert  
Bit[5] Media ID 1 Polarity  
= 0: Don’t invert (default)  
= 1: Invert  
147  
Table 59 - Floppy Disk Controller, Logical Device 0 [Logical Device Number = 0x00]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
Bits[7:6] Boot Floppy  
STATE  
= 00  
= 01  
= 10  
FDD 0 (default)  
FDD 1  
Reserved (neither drive A or B is a boot  
drive).  
= 11  
Reserved (neither drive A or B is a boot  
drive).  
FDD Type Register  
Default = 0xFF  
0xF2 R/W Bits[1:0] Floppy Drive A Type  
Bits[3:2] Floppy Drive B Type  
C
Bits[5:4] Reserved (could be used to store Floppy  
Drive C type)  
Bits[7:6] Reserved (could be used to store Floppy  
Drive D type)  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Note: The FDC37C67x supports  
two floppy drives  
0xF3 R  
Reserved, Read as 0 (read only)  
C
C
FDD0  
0xF4 R/W Bits[1:0] Drive Type Select: DT1, DT0  
Bits[2] Read as 0 (read only)  
Default = 0x00  
Bits[4:3] Data Rate Table Select: DRT1, DRT0  
Bits[5] Read as 0 (read only)  
Bits[6] Precompensation Disable PTS  
=0 Use Precompensation  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
=1 No Precompensation  
Bits[7] Read as 0 (read only)  
FDD1  
0xF5 R/W Refer to definition and default for 0xF4  
C
148  
Table 60 - Parallel Port, Logical Device 3 [Logical Device Number = 0x03]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
PP Mode Register  
0xF0 R/W Bits[2:0] Parallel Port Mode  
= 100 Printer Mode (default)  
C
Default = 0x3C  
= 000 Standard and Bi-directional (SPP) Mode  
= 001 EPP-1.9 and SPP Mode  
= 101 EPP-1.7 and SPP Mode  
= 010 ECP Mode  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
= 011 ECP and EPP-1.9 Mode  
= 111 ECP and EPP-1.7 Mode  
Bit[6:3] ECP FIFO Threshold  
0111b (default)  
Bit[7] PP Interupt Type  
Not valid when the parallel port is in the Printer  
Mode (100) or the Standard & Bi-directional Mode  
(000).  
= 1  
= 0  
Pulsed Low, released to high-Z.  
IRQ follows nACK when parallel port in EPP  
Mode or [Printer,SPP, EPP] under ECP.  
IRQ level type when the parallel port is in ECP,  
TEST, or Centronics FIFO Mode.  
Bits[1:0] PPFDC - muxed PP/FDC control  
= 00 Normal Parallel Port Mode  
PP Mode Register 2  
0xF1 R/W  
= 01 PPFD1:  
Drive 0 is on the FDC pins  
Default = 0x00  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Drive 1 is on the Parallel port pins  
Drive 2 is on the FDC pins  
Drive 3 is on the FDC pins  
= 10 PPFD2:  
Drive 0 is on the Parallel port pins  
Drive 1 is on the Parallel port pins  
Drive 2 is on the FDC pins  
Drive 3 is on the FDC pins  
Bits[7:2] Reserved. Set to zero.  
149  
Table 61 - Serial Port 1, Logical Device 4 [Logical Device Number = 0x04]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
Serial Port 1  
0xF0 R/W Bit[0] MIDI Mode  
C
Mode Register  
= 0  
= 1  
MIDI support disabled (default)  
MIDI support enabled  
Default = 0x00  
Bit[1] High Speed  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
= 0  
= 1  
High Speed Disabled(default)  
High Speed Enabled  
Bit[6:2] Reserved, set to zero  
Bit[7]: Share IRQ  
=0 UARTS use different IRQs  
=1 UARTS share a common IRQ  
see Note 1 below.  
Note 1: To properly share and IRQ,  
1. Configure UART1 (or UART2) to use the desired IRQ pin.  
2. Configure UART2 (or UART1) to use No IRQ selected.  
3. Set the share IRQ bit.  
Note: If both UARTs are configured to use different IRQ pins and the share IRQ bit is set,  
then both of the UART IRQ pins will assert when either UART generates an interrupt.  
UART Interrupt Operation Table  
Table 62 - Serial Port 2, Logical Device 5 [Logical Device Number = 0x05]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
Serial Port 2  
0xF0 R/W Bit[0] MIDI Mode  
C
Mode Register  
= 0  
= 1  
MIDI support disabled (default)  
MIDI support enabled  
Default = 0x00  
Bit[1] High Speed  
= 0  
= 1  
High Speed disabled(default)  
High Speed enabled  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Bit[7:2] Reserved, set to zero  
150  
Table 62 - Serial Port 2, Logical Device 5 [Logical Device Number = 0x05]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
IR Option Register  
0xF1 R/W Bit[0] Receive Polarity  
C
= 0  
= 1  
Active High (Default)  
Active Low  
Default = 0x02  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Bit[1] Transmit Polarity  
= 0  
= 1  
Active High  
Active Low (Default)  
Bit[2] Duplex Select  
= 0  
= 1  
Full Duplex (Default)  
Half Duplex  
Bits[5:3] IR Mode  
= 000 Standard (Default)  
= 001 IrDA  
= 010 ASK-IR  
= 011 Reserved  
= 1xx  
Reserved  
Bit[6] IR Location Mux  
= 0  
= 1  
Use Serial port TX2 and RX2 (Default)  
Use alternate IRRX (pin 61) and IRTX (pin  
62)  
Bit[7] Reserved, write 0.  
IR Half Duplex  
Timeout  
0xF2  
Bits [7:0]  
These bits set the half duplex time-out for the IR port.  
This value is 0 to 10msec in 100usec increments.  
0= blank during transmit/receive  
1= blank during transmit/receive + 100usec  
. . .  
Default = 0x03  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
151  
Table 63 - KYBD, Logical Device 7 [Logical Device Number = 0x07]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
0xF0  
DEFINITION  
KRESET and GateA20 Select  
STATE  
KRST_GA20  
R/W  
Bit[7] Polarity Select for P12  
= 0 P12 active low (default)  
= 1 P12 active high  
Bits[6:3] Reserved  
Default = 0x00  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Bit[2] Port 92 Select  
= 0 Port 92 Disabled  
= 1 Port 92 Enabled  
Bit[1] Reserved  
Bit[0] Reserved  
0xF1 -  
0xFF  
Reserved - read as ‘0’  
Table 64 - Auxilliary I/O, Logical Device 8 [Logical Device Number = 0x08]  
NAME  
REG  
INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
SMI Enable  
Register 1  
0xB4 R/W  
This register is used to enable the different interrupt  
sources onto the group nSMI output.  
C
1=Enable  
0=Disable  
Default = 0x00  
on Vcc POR  
Bit[0] Reserved  
Bit[1] EN_PINT  
Bit[2] EN_U2INT  
Bit[3] EN_U1INT  
Bit[4] EN_FINT  
Bit[5] Reserved  
Bit[6] Reserved  
Bit[7] EN_WDT  
SMI Enable  
Register 2  
0xB5 R/W  
This register is used to enable the different interrupt  
sources onto the group nSMI output, and the group  
nSMI output onto the nSMI GPI/O pin.  
C
Default = 0x00  
on Vcc POR  
Unless otherwise noted,  
1=Enable  
0=Disable  
Bit[0] EN_MINT  
Bit[1] EN_KINT  
Bit[2] EN_IRINT  
152  
Table 64 - Auxilliary I/O, Logical Device 8 [Logical Device Number = 0x08]  
NAME  
REG  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
INDEX  
Bit[3] Reserved  
Bit[4] EN_P12: Enable 8042 P1.2 to route internally  
to nSMI. 0=Do not route to nSMI, 1=Enable  
routing to nSMI.  
Bit[5] Reserved  
Bit[6] EN_SMI_S: Enables nSMI Interrupt onto  
Serial IRQ.  
Bit[7] EN_SMI_P: Enables nSMI Interrupt onto  
Parallel Interrupt Pin IRQ10. 0=SMI pin  
floats, 1=Output onto nSMI GPI/O pin.  
This register is used to read the status of the SMI  
inputs.  
SMI Status  
Register 1  
0xB6 R/W  
C
Default = 0x00  
on Vcc POR  
The following bits must be cleared at their source.  
Bit[0] Reserved  
Bit[1] PINT (Parallel Port Interrupt)  
Bit[2] U2INT (UART 2 Interrupt)  
Bit[3] U1INT (UART 1 Interrupt)  
Bit[4] FINT (Floppy Disk Controller Interrupt)  
Bit[5] Reserved  
Bit[6] Reserved  
Bit[7] WDT (Watch Dog Timer)  
This register is used to read the status of the SMI  
inputs.  
SMI Status  
Register 2  
0xB7 R/W  
C
Bit[0] MINT: Mouse Interrupt. Cleared at source.  
Bit[1] KINT: Keyboard Interrupt. Cleared at source.  
Bit[2] IRINT: This bit is set by a transition on the IR  
pin (RDX2 or IRRX as selected in CR L5-F1-  
B6 i.e., after the MUX). Cleared by a read of  
this register.  
Default = 0x00  
on Vcc POR  
Bit[3] Reserved  
Bit[4] P12: 8042 P1.2. Cleared at source  
Bit[7:5] Reserved  
Default = 0x00  
on VTR POR  
Pin Multiplex  
Controls  
0xB8 R/W  
0xC0  
Bits[7:0] Reserved  
C
Bit[0] IR Mode Select  
Bit[1] DMA 3 Select  
Bit[2] Serial IRQ Select  
Bit[3] 8042 Select  
Bit[4] IRRX 3 Select  
Bit[5:7] Reserved  
Default = 0x06 on  
Vcc POR  
Force Disk Change  
0xC1  
Bit[0] Force Change 0  
C,R  
153  
Table 64 - Auxilliary I/O, Logical Device 8 [Logical Device Number = 0x08]  
NAME  
REG  
INDEX  
(R/W)  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
Default = 0x03 on  
Vcc POR  
Bit[1] Force Change 1  
Bit[7:2] Reserved  
Force Change[1:0] can be written to 1 but are not  
clearable by software.  
Force Change 1 is cleared on nSTEP and nDS1  
Force Change 0 is cleared on nSTEP and nDS0  
DSKCHG (FDC DIR Register, Bit 7) = (nDS0 AND  
Force Change 0) OR (nDS1 AND Force Change 1)  
OR nDSKCHG  
Floppy Data Rate  
Select Shadow  
0xC2  
(R)  
Bit[0] Data Rate Select 0  
Bit[1] Data Rate Select 1  
Bit[2] PRECOMP 0  
C
Bit[3] PRECOMP 1  
Bit[4] PRECOMP 2  
Bit[5] Reserved  
Bit[6] Power Down  
Bit[7] Soft Reset  
UART1 FIFO  
Control Shadow  
0xC3  
0xC4  
Bit[0] FIFO Enable  
C
C
Bit[1] RCVR FIFO Reset  
Bit[2] XMIT FIFO Reset  
Bit[3] DMA Mode Select  
Bit[5:4] Reserved  
Bit[6] RCVR Trigger (LSB)  
Bit[7] RCVR Trigger (MSB)  
Bit[0] FIFO Enable  
UART2 FIFO  
Control Shadow  
Bit[1] RCVR FIFO Reset  
Bit[2] XMIT FIFO Reset  
Bit[3] DMA Mode Select  
Bit[5:4] Reserved  
Bit[6] RCVR Trigger (LSB)  
Bit[7] RCVR Trigger (MSB)  
154  
Table 65 - nRTS MUXING  
MUX CONTROLS  
STATE OF  
PIN  
16 BIT ADDRESS  
SERIRQSEL  
UNCONNECTED  
NAME  
nRTS2  
QUAL. (CR24.6)  
(LD8:CRC0.2)  
SELECTED FUNCTION  
nRTS2 (default)  
IRQ5  
INPUTS  
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
-
-
0
-
SA12  
Reserved  
Table 66 - nCTS2 MUXING  
MUX CONTROLS  
STATE OF  
PIN  
16 BIT ADDRESS  
SERIRQSEL  
UNCONNECTED  
NAME  
nCTS2  
QUAL. (CR24.6)  
(LD8:CRC0.2)  
SELECTED FUNCTION  
INPUTS  
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
nCTS2 (default)  
IRQ6  
1
-
0
-
SA13  
Reserved  
Table 67 - nDTR2 MUXING  
MUX CONTROLS  
STATE OF  
PIN  
16 BIT ADDRESS  
SERIRQSEL  
UNCONNECTED  
NAME  
nDTR2  
QUAL. (CR24.6)  
(LD8:CRC0.2)  
SELECTED FUNCTION  
INPUTS  
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
nDTR2 (default)  
IRQ7  
-
-
0
-
SA14  
Reserved  
Table 68 - nDSR2 MUXING  
MUX CONTROLS  
STATE OF  
PIN  
16 BIT ADDRESS  
SERIRQSEL  
UNCONNECTED  
NAME  
nDSR2  
QUAL. (CR24.6)  
(LD8:CRC0.2)  
SELECTED FUNCTION  
INPUTS  
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
nDSR2 (default)  
1
-
0
-
IRQ10*1  
SA15  
Reserved  
Note: *1 LD8:CRB5.7 controls the IRQ10/nSMI interrupt mux.  
155  
Table 69 - nDCD2 MUXING  
MUX CONTROLS  
STATE OF  
PIN  
8042COMSEL.  
SERIRQSEL  
UNCONNECTED  
NAME  
nDCD2  
(LD8:CRC0.3)  
(LD8:CRC0.2)  
SELECTED FUNCTION  
nDCD2 (default)  
IRQ11  
INPUTS  
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
-
-
P12  
Reserved  
-
Table 70 - nRI2 MUXING  
MUX CONTROLS  
STATE OF  
PIN  
NAME  
nRI2  
8042COMSEL.  
(LD8:CRC0.3)  
SERIRQSEL  
(LD8:CRC0.2)  
UNCONNECTED  
SELECTED FUNCTION  
INPUTS  
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
nRI2 (default)  
IRQ12  
P16  
Reserved  
1
-
-
-
Table 71 - DRQ3 MUXING  
MUX CONTROL  
STATE OF  
DMA3SEL  
UNCONNECTED  
PIN NAME  
DRQ3  
(LD8:CRC0.1)  
SELECTED FUNCTION  
DRQ3 (default)  
P12  
INPUTS  
1
0
-
-
Table 72 - nDACK3 MUXING  
MUX CONTROL  
STATE OF  
DMA3SEL  
UNCONNECTED  
PIN NAME  
nDACK3  
(LD8:CRC0.1)  
SELECTED FUNCTION  
nDACK3 (default)  
P16  
INPUTS  
1
0
1
-
Table 73 - SER_IRQ MUXING  
MUX CONTROL  
STATE OF  
SERIRQSEL  
UNCONNECTED  
PIN NAME  
SER_IRQ  
(LD8:CRC0.2)  
SELECTED FUNCTION  
SER_IRQ (default)  
IRQ3  
INPUTS  
1
0
1
-
156  
Table 74 - PCI_CLK MUXING  
MUX CONTROL  
STATE OF  
SERIRQSEL  
UNCONNECTED  
PIN NAME  
PCI_CLK  
(LD8:CRC0.2)  
SELECTED FUNCTION  
PCI_CLK (default)  
IRQ4  
INPUTS  
1
0
1
-
Table 75 - DRVDEN1 MUXING  
MUX CONTROLS  
STATE OF  
UNCONNECTED  
INPUTS  
IRMODESEL  
PIN NAME (LD8:CRC0.0)  
IRRX3SEL  
(LD8:CRC0.4)  
SELECTED  
FUNCTION  
DRVDEN1  
(default)  
DRVDEN1  
0
-
-
1
1
0
1
IRMODE*1  
IRRX3  
-
0
Note*1: IRRX3SEL Default (0).  
157  
Table 76 - Auxilliary I/O, Logical Device 8 [Logical Device Number = 0x08]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
Bit[0] Reserved  
Bit[1] Reserved  
WDT_TIME_OUT  
0xF1  
C
Bits[6:2] Reserved, = 00000  
Bit[7] WDT Time-out Value Units Select  
= 0 Minutes (default)  
Default = 0x00  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
= 1 Seconds  
WDT_VAL  
0xF2  
0xF3  
Watch-dog Timer Time-out Value  
Binary coded, units = minutes(default) or seconds,  
selectable via Bit[7] of Reg 0xF1, LD 8.  
0x00 Time out disabled  
0x01 Time-out = 1 minute (second)  
.........  
C
C
Default = 0x00  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
0xFF Time-out = 255 minutes (seconds)  
WDT_CFG  
Watch-dog timer Configuration  
Bit[0] Joy-stick Enable  
Default = 0x00  
=1  
WDT is reset upon an I/O read or write of  
the Game Port  
WDT is not affected by I/O reads or writes  
to the Game Port.  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
=0  
Bit[1] Keyboard Enable  
=1  
=0  
WDT is reset upon a Keyboard interrupt.  
WDT is not affected by Keyboard interrupts.  
Bit[2] Mouse Enable  
=1  
=0  
WDT is reset upon a Mouse interrupt  
WDT is not affected by Mouse interrupts.  
Bit[3] Reserved  
Bits[7:4] WDT Interrupt Mapping  
1111 = IRQ15  
.........  
0011 = IRQ3  
0010 = Invalid  
0001 = IRQ1  
0000 = Disable  
158  
Table 76 - Auxilliary I/O, Logical Device 8 [Logical Device Number = 0x08]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
Watch-dog timer Control  
Bit[0] Watch-dog Status Bit, R/W  
STATE  
WDT_CTRL  
0xF4  
C
Default = 0x00  
=1  
=0  
WD timeout occured  
WD timer counting  
Bit[1] Reserved  
Bit[2] Force Timeout, W  
Cleared by VTR  
POR  
=1  
Forces WD timeout event; this bit is self-  
clearing  
Bit[3] P20 Force Timeout Enable, R/W  
= 1  
Allows rising edge of P20, from the  
Keyboard Controller, to force the WD  
timeout event. A WD timeout event may  
still be forced by setting the Force Timeout  
Bit, bit 2.  
= 0  
P20 activity does not generate the WD  
timeout event.  
Note: The P20 signal will remain high for a minimum  
of 1us and can remain high indefinitely. Therefore,  
when P20 forced timeouts are enabled, a self-  
clearing edge-detect circuit is used to generate a  
signal which is ORed with the signal generated by  
the Force Timeout Bit.  
Bit[7:4] Reserved. Set to 0  
159  
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION  
MAXIMUM GUARANTEED RATINGS*  
Operating Temperature Range......................................................................................... 0oC to +70oC  
Storage Temperature Range..........................................................................................-55o to +150oC  
Lead Temperature Range (soldering, 10 seconds) ....................................................................+325oC  
Positive Voltage on any pin, with respect to Ground................................................................Vcc+0.3V  
Negative Voltage on any pin, with respect to Ground.................................................................... -0.3V  
Maximum Vcc................................................................................................................................. +7V  
*Stresses above those listed above could cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress  
rating only and functional operation of the device at any other condition above those indicated in the  
operation sections of this specification is not implied.  
Note: When powering this device from laboratory or system power supplies, it is important that the  
Absolute Maximum Ratings not be exceeded or device failure can result. Some power supplies exhibit  
voltage spikes on their outputs when the AC power is switched on or off. In addition, voltage  
transients on the AC power line may appear on the DC output. If this possibility exists, it is suggested  
that a clamp circuit be used.  
DC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS  
(TA = 0°C - 70°C, Vcc = +5 V ± 10%)  
PARAMETER  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
2.0  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
COMMENTS  
I Type Input Buffer  
VILI  
VIHI  
0.8  
V
V
TTL Levels  
Low Input Level  
High Input Level  
IS Type Input Buffer  
VILIS  
VIHIS  
VHYS  
0.8  
0.4  
V
V
Schmitt Trigger  
Schmitt Trigger  
Low Input Level  
High Input Level  
2.2  
250  
mV  
Schmitt Trigger Hysteresis  
ICLK Input Buffer  
VILCK  
VIHCK  
V
V
Low Input Level  
High Input Level  
2.2  
160  
PARAMETER  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
COMMENTS  
ICLK2 Input Buffer  
500  
mV  
V P - P  
Input Level  
Input Leakage  
(All I and IS buffers)  
IIL  
-10  
+10  
VIN = 0  
Low Input Leakage  
mA  
IIH  
-10  
2.4  
+10  
4.0  
VIN = VCC  
High Input Leakage  
mA  
3.0  
V
VBAT  
250  
1000  
100  
nA  
nA  
VCC=VSS=0  
VCC=5V, VBAT=3V  
IBAT  
Standby Current  
Input Leakage  
O4 Type Buffer  
Low Output Level  
High Output Level  
Output Leakage  
VOL  
VOH  
IOL  
0.4  
V
V
IOL = 4 mA  
IOH = -2 mA  
2.4  
-10  
+10  
VIN = 0 to VCC  
(Note 1)  
mA  
O8SR Type Buffer  
Low Output Level  
High Output Level  
Output Leakage  
Rise Time  
VOL  
VOH  
IOL  
0.4  
V
V
IOL = 8 mA  
IOH = -8 mA  
2.4  
-10  
5
+10  
VIN = 0 to VCC  
(Note 1)  
mA  
ns  
ns  
TRT  
TFL  
5
Fall Time  
O24 Type Buffer  
VOL  
VOH  
IOL  
0.4  
V
V
IOL = 24 mA  
IOH = -12 mA  
Low Output Level  
High Output Level  
Output Leakage  
2.4  
-10  
+10  
VIN = 0 to VCC  
(Note 1)  
mA  
161  
PARAMETER  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
COMMENTS  
O16SR Type Buffer  
VOL  
VOH  
IOL  
0.4  
V
V
IOL = 16 mA  
Low Output Level  
High Output Level  
Output Leakage  
Rise Time  
2.4  
-10  
5
IOH = -16 mA  
+10  
VIN = 0 to VCC  
(Note 1)  
mA  
ns  
ns  
TRT  
TFL  
5
Fall Time  
OD16P Type Buffer  
VOL  
IOL  
0.4  
V
IOL = 16 mA  
IOH = 90 mA  
VIN = 0 to VCC  
(Note 1)  
Low Output Level  
Output Leakage  
-10  
+10  
mA  
OD24 Type Buffer  
Low Output Level  
Output Leakage  
VOL  
IOL  
0.4  
V
IOL = 24 mA  
+10  
VIN = 0 to VCC  
(Note 1)  
mA  
OD48 Type Buffer  
Low Output Level  
Output Leakage  
VOL  
IOL  
0.4  
V
IOL = 48 mA  
+10  
VIN = 0 to VCC  
(Note 1)  
mA  
OCLK2 Type Buffer  
Low Output Level  
High Output Level  
Output Leakage  
VOL  
VOH  
IOL  
0.4  
V
V
IOL = 2 mA  
IOH = -2 mA  
3.5  
-10  
+10  
VIN = 0 to VCC  
(Note 1)  
mA  
IIL  
IIL  
± 10  
± 10  
VCC = 0V  
VIN = 6V Max  
ChiProtect  
mA  
mA  
(SLCT, PE, BUSY, nACK, nERROR)  
VCC = 0V  
VIN = 6V Max  
Backdrive  
(nSTROBE, nAUTOFD, nINIT,  
nSLCTIN)  
162  
PARAMETER  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
COMMENTS  
VCC = 0V  
VIN = 6V Max  
IIL  
± 10  
Backdrive  
(PD0-PD7)  
mA  
Suppy Current Active  
ICCI  
mA  
All outputs open.  
4.5  
70  
90  
Note 1: All output leakages are measured with the current pins in high impedance  
Note 2: Output leakage is measured with the low driving output off, either for a high level output or a  
high impedance state.  
Note 3: KBCLK, KBDATA, MCLK, MDATA contain 90uA min pull-ups.  
CAPACITANCE TA = 25°C; fc = 1MHz; VCC = 5V  
LIMITS  
PARAMETER  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNIT  
TEST CONDITION  
Clock Input Capacitance  
CIN  
20  
pF  
All pins except pin  
under test tied to AC  
ground  
Input Capacitance  
Output Capacitance  
CIN  
10  
20  
pF  
pF  
COUT  
163  
TIMING DIAGRAMS  
For the Timing Diagrams shown, the following capacitive loads are used.  
CAPACITANCE  
NAME  
SD[0:7]  
IOCHRDY  
IRQ[3:7,10:12]  
DRQ[1:3]  
nWGATE  
nWDATA  
nHDSEL  
nDIR  
TOTAL (pF)  
240  
240  
120  
120  
240  
240  
240  
240  
240  
240  
240  
240  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
240  
240  
240  
240  
240  
240  
240  
240  
240  
nSTEP  
nDS[1:0]  
nMTR[1:0]  
DRVDEN[1:0]  
TXD1  
nRTS1  
nDTR1  
TXD2  
nRTS2  
nDTR2  
PD[0:7]  
nSLCTIN  
nINIT  
nALF  
nSTB  
KDAT  
KCLK  
MDAT  
MCLK  
164  
t3  
SAx  
t4  
SD<7:0>  
t1  
t2  
t5  
nIOW  
FIGURE 3 - IOW TIMING FOR PORT 92  
IOW Timing  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
MIN  
40  
0
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
ns  
t1  
t2  
t3  
t4  
t5  
SAx Valid to nIOW Asserted  
SDATA Valid to nIOW Asserted  
nIOW Asserted to SAx Invalid  
ns  
10  
0
ns  
nIOW Deasserted to DATA Invalid  
nIOW Deasserted to nIOW or nIOR Asserted  
ns  
100  
ns  
165  
t 1  
t 2  
V c c  
t 3  
A l l H o s t  
A c c e s s e s  
FIGURE 4 - POWER-UP TIMING  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
Vcc Slew from 4.5V to 0V  
MIN  
300  
100  
125  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
ms  
t1  
t2  
t3  
Vcc Slew from 0V to 4.5V  
ms  
All Host Accesses After Powerup (Note 1)  
500  
ms  
Note 1: Internal write-protection period after Vcc passes 4.5 volts on power-up  
166  
t10  
AEN  
t3  
SA[x], nCS  
t2  
t1  
t4  
t6  
nIOW  
SD[x]  
t5  
t7  
DATA VALID  
FINTR  
PINTR  
IBF  
t8  
t9  
FIGURE 5 - ISA WRITE  
DESCRIPTION  
NAME  
MIN  
10  
TYP  
MAX UNITS  
t1  
t2  
SA[x], nCS and AEN valid to nIOW asserted  
nIOW asserted to nIOW deasserted  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
80  
t3  
nIOW asserted to SA[x], nCS invalid  
10  
t4  
SD[x] Valid to nIOW deasserted  
45  
t5  
SD[x] Hold from nIOW deasserted  
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
t6  
nIOW deasserted to nIOW asserted  
25  
10  
t7  
nIOW deasserted to FINTR deasserted (Note 1)  
nIOW deasserted to PINTER deasserted (Note 2)  
IBF (internal signal) asserted from nIOW deasserted  
nIOW deasserted to AEN invalid  
55  
260  
40  
t8  
t9  
t10  
Note 1: FINTR refers to the IRQ used by the floppy disk.  
Note 2: PINTR refers to the IRQ used by the parallel port  
167  
t13  
AEN  
t3  
SA[x], nCS  
t1  
t7  
t2  
t6  
nIOR  
SD[x]  
t4  
t5  
DATA VALID  
PD[x], nERROR,  
PE, SLCT, ACK, BUSY  
t10  
FINTER  
t9  
PINTER  
PCOBF  
t11  
t12  
AUXOBF1  
nIOR/nIOW  
t8  
FIGURE 6 - ISA READ  
SEE TIMING PARAMETERS ON NEXT PAGE  
168  
ISA READ TIMING  
DESCRIPTION  
NAME  
t1  
MIN  
10  
TYP MAX UNITS  
SA[x], nCS and AEN valid to nIOR asserted  
nIOR asserted to nIOR deasserted  
ns  
ns  
ns  
t2  
50  
t3  
nIOR asserted to SA[x], nCS invalid  
nIOR asserted to Data Valid  
10  
t4  
50  
25  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
t5  
Data Hold/float from nIOR deasserted  
nIOR deasserted  
10  
25  
t6  
t8  
nIOR asserted after nIOW deasserted  
nIOR/nIOR, nIOW/nIOW transfers from/to ECP FIFO  
Parallel Port setup to nIOR asserted  
nIOR asserted to PINTER deasserted  
nIOR deasserted to FINTER deasserted  
nIOR deasserted to PCOBF deasserted (Notes 3,5)  
nIOR deasserted to AUXOBF1 deasserted (Notes 4,5)  
nIOW deasserted to AEN invalid  
80  
t8  
150  
t7  
20  
55  
t9  
t10  
t11  
t12  
t13  
260  
80  
80  
10  
Note 1: FINTR refers to the IRQ used by the floppy disk.  
Note 2: PINTR refers to the IRQ used by the parallel port.  
Note 3: PCOBF is used for the Keyboard IRQ.  
Note 4: AUXOBF1 is used for the Mouse IRQ.  
Note 5: Applies only if deassertion is performed in hardware.  
169  
t2  
t1  
PCOBF  
AUXOBF1  
nWRT  
t3  
IBF  
nRD  
FIGURE 7 - INTERNAL 8042 CPU TIMING  
DESCRIPTION MIN  
NAME  
TYP MAX UNITS  
t1  
t2  
t3  
nWRT deasserted to AUXOBF1 asserted (Notes 1,2)  
nWRT deasserted to PCOBF asserted (Notes 1,3)  
nRD deasserted to IBF deasserted (Note 1)  
40  
40  
40  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Note 1: IBF, nWRT and nRD are internal signals.  
Note 2: PCOBF is used for the Keyboard IRQ.  
Note 3: AUXOBF1 is used for the Mouse IRQ.  
170  
t1  
t2  
t2  
CLOCKI  
FIGURE 8A - INPUT CLOCK TIMING  
DESCRIPTION MIN  
NAME  
TYP  
70  
MAX  
UNITS  
ns  
t1  
t2  
t1  
t2  
Clock Cycle Time for 14.318MHZ  
Clock High Time/Low Time for 14.318MHz  
Clock Cycle Time for 32KHZ  
35  
ns  
31.25  
16.53  
ms  
Clock High Time/Low Time for 32KHz  
Clock Rise Time/Fall Time (not shown)  
ms  
5
ns  
t4  
RESET_DRV  
FIGURE 8B - RESET TIMING  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
RESET width (Note 1)  
MIN  
TYP MAX  
UNITS  
t4  
1.5  
ms  
Note 1: The RESET width is dependent upon the processor clock. The RESET must be active while  
the clock is running and stable.  
171  
t15  
AEN  
t16  
t3  
t2  
FDRQ,  
PDRQ  
t1  
t4  
nDACK  
t12  
t14  
t11  
t6  
t5  
t8  
nIOR  
or  
nIOW  
t10  
t9  
t7  
DATA  
(DO-D7)  
DATA VALID  
t13  
TC  
FIGURE 9A - DMA TIMING (SINGLE TRANSFER MODE)  
NAME  
t1  
DESCRIPTION  
nDACK Delay Time from FDRQ High  
DRQ Reset Delay from nIOR or nIOW  
FDRQ Reset Delay from nDACK Low  
nDACK Width  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
ns  
0
t2  
100  
100  
ns  
t3  
ns  
t4  
150  
0
ns  
t5  
nIOR Delay from FDRQ High  
nIOW Delay from FDRQ High  
Data Access Time from nIOR Low  
Data Set Up Time to nIOW High  
Data to Float Delay from nIOR High  
Data Hold Time from nIOW High  
nDACK Set Up to nIOW/nIOR Low  
nDACK Hold after nIOW/nIOR High  
TC Pulse Width  
ns  
t6  
0
ns  
t7  
100  
60  
ns  
t8  
40  
10  
10  
5
ns  
t9  
ns  
t10  
t11  
t12  
t13  
t14  
t15  
t16  
ns  
ns  
10  
60  
40  
10  
ns  
ns  
AEN Set Up to nIOR/nIOW  
ns  
AEN Hold from nDACK  
ns  
TC Active to PDRQ Inactive  
100  
ns  
172  
t15  
AEN  
t16  
t2  
t3  
FDRQ,  
PDRQ  
t1  
t4  
nDACK  
t12  
t14  
t11  
t6  
t5  
t8  
nIOR  
or  
nIOW  
t10  
t9  
t7  
DATA  
(DO-D7)  
DATA VALID  
DATA VALID  
t13  
TC  
FIGURE 9B - DMA TIMING (BURST TRANSFER MODE)  
NAME  
t1  
DESCRIPTION  
nDACK Delay Time from FDRQ High  
DRQ Reset Delay from nIOR or nIOW  
FDRQ Reset Delay from nDACK Low  
nDACK Width  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
ns  
0
t2  
100  
100  
ns  
t3  
ns  
t4  
150  
0
ns  
t5  
nIOR Delay from FDRQ High  
nIOW Delay from FDRQ High  
Data Access Time from nIOR Low  
Data Set Up Time to nIOW High  
Data to Float Delay from nIOR High  
Data Hold Time from nIOW High  
nDACK Set Up to nIOW/nIOR Low  
nDACK Hold after nIOW/nIOR High  
TC Pulse Width  
ns  
t6  
0
ns  
t7  
100  
60  
ns  
t8  
40  
10  
10  
5
ns  
t9  
ns  
t10  
t11  
t12  
t13  
t14  
t15  
t16  
ns  
ns  
10  
60  
40  
10  
ns  
ns  
AEN Set Up to nIOR/nIOW  
ns  
AEN Hold from nDACK  
ns  
TC Active to PDRQ Inactive  
100  
ns  
173  
t3  
nDIR  
t4  
t1  
t2  
nSTEP  
t5  
nDS0-3  
nINDEX  
t6  
t7  
t8  
nRDATA  
nWDATA  
nIOW  
t9  
t9  
nDS0-1,  
MTR0-1  
FIGURE 10 - DISK DRIVE TIMING (AT MODE ONLY)  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
nDIR Set Up to STEP Low  
MIN  
TYP  
4
MAX  
UNITS  
X*  
t1  
t2  
t3  
t4  
t5  
t6  
t7  
t8  
t9  
nSTEP Active Time Low  
24  
96  
132  
20  
2
X*  
nDIR Hold Time after nSTEP  
nSTEP Cycle Time  
X*  
X*  
nDS0-1 Hold Time from nSTEP Low  
nINDEX Pulse Width  
X*  
X*  
nRDATA Active Time Low  
nWDATA Write Data Width Low  
nDS0-1, MTRO-1 from End of nIOW  
40  
.5  
ns  
Y*  
25  
ns  
*X specifies one MCLK period and Y specifies one WCLK period.  
MCLK = 16 x Data Rate (at 500 kb/s MCLK = 8 MHz)  
WCLK = 2 x Data Rate (at 500 kb/s WCLK = 1 MHz)  
174  
nIOW  
t1  
nRTSx,  
nDTRx  
t5  
IRQx  
nCTSx,  
nDSRx,  
nDCDx  
t6  
t2  
t4  
IRQx  
nIOW  
t3  
IRQx  
nIOR  
nRIx  
FIGURE 11 - SERIAL PORT TIMING  
NAME  
t1  
DESCRIPTION  
nRTSx, nDTRx Delay from nIOW  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX UNITS  
200  
100  
120  
125  
100  
100  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
t2  
IRQx Active Delay from nCTSx, nDSRx, nDCDx  
IRQx Inactive Delay from nIOR (Leading Edge)  
IRQx Inactive Delay from nIOW (Trailing Edge)  
IRQx Inactive Delay from nIOW  
t3  
t4  
t5  
10  
t6  
IRQx Active Delay from nRIx  
175  
PD0- PD7  
nIOW  
t6  
t1  
nINIT, nSTROBE.  
nAUTOFD, SLCTIN  
nACK  
t2  
nPINTR  
(SPP)  
t4  
t3  
PINTR  
(ECP or EPP Enabled)  
nFAULT (ECP)  
nERROR  
(ECP)  
t5  
t2  
t3  
PINTR  
FIGURE 12 - PARALLEL PORT TIMING  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
t1  
PD0-7, nINIT, nSTROBE, nAUTOFD Delay from  
nIOW  
100  
ns  
t2  
t3  
t4  
t5  
t6  
PINTR Delay from nACK, nFAULT  
PINTR Active Low in ECP and EPP Modes  
PINTR Delay from nACK  
60  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
200  
300  
105  
105  
100  
nERROR Active to PINTR Active  
PD0 - PD7 Delay from IOW Active  
Note:  
PINTR refers to the IRQ used by the parallel port.  
176  
t18  
t9  
A0-A10  
SD<7:0>  
t17  
t8  
t12  
t19  
nIOW  
t10  
t11  
IOCHRDY  
t13  
t22  
t20  
t2  
t5  
nWRITE  
PD<7:0>  
t1  
t16  
t3  
t14  
t4  
nDATAST  
nADDRSTB  
t15  
t6  
t7  
nWAIT  
PDIR  
t21  
FIGURE 13A - EPP 1.9 DATA OR ADDRESS WRITE CYCLE  
SEE TIMING PARAMETERS ON NEXT PAGE  
177  
FIGURE 13B - EPP 1.9 DATA OR ADDRESS WRITE CYCLE TIMING  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
nIOW Asserted to PDATA Valid  
MIN  
0
TYP  
MAX  
50  
UNITS  
ns  
t1  
t2  
t3  
t4  
nWAIT Asserted to nWRITE Change (Note 1)  
nWRITE to Command Asserted  
60  
5
185  
35  
ns  
ns  
nWAIT Deasserted to Command Deasserted  
(Note 1)  
60  
190  
ns  
t5  
t6  
nWAIT Asserted to PDATA Invalid (Note 1)  
Time Out  
0
10  
0
ns  
ms  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
12  
t7  
Command Deasserted to nWAIT Asserted  
SDATA Valid to nIOW Asserted  
nIOW Deasserted to DATA Invalid  
nIOW Asserted to IOCHRDY Asserted  
t8  
10  
0
t9  
t10  
t11  
0
24  
nWAIT Deasserted to IOCHRDY Deasserted  
(Note 1)  
60  
160  
t12  
t13  
t14  
t15  
t16  
t17  
t18  
t19  
t20  
t21  
t22  
IOCHRDY Deasserted to nIOW Deasserted  
nIOW Asserted to nWRITE Asserted  
nWAIT Asserted to Command Asserted (Note 1)  
Command Asserted to nWAIT Deasserted  
PDATA Valid to Command Asserted  
Ax Valid to nIOW Asserted  
10  
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
ms  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
70  
210  
10  
60  
0
10  
40  
10  
40  
60  
0
nIOW Asserted to Ax Invalid  
nIOW Deasserted to nIOW or nIOR Asserted  
nWAIT Asserted to nWRITE Asserted (Note 1)  
nWAIT Asserted to PDIR Low  
185  
PDIR Low to nWRITE Asserted  
0
Note 1: nWAIT must be filtered to compensate for ringing on the parallel bus cable. WAIT is  
considered to have settled after it does not transition for a minimum of 50 nsec.  
178  
t20  
t12  
A0-A10  
IOR  
t19  
t11  
t22  
t13  
SD<7:0>  
t18  
t10  
t8  
IOCHRDY  
t24  
t23  
t27  
t17  
PDIR  
nWRITE  
t9  
t21  
PData bus driven  
by peripheral  
t2  
t25  
t5  
t4  
t16  
PD<7:0>  
t28  
t26  
t1  
t14  
t3  
DATASTB  
ADDRSTB  
t15  
t7  
t6  
nWAIT  
FIGURE 14A - EPP 1.9 DATA OR ADDRESS READ CYCLE  
SEE TIMING PARAMETERS ON NEXT PAGE  
179  
FIGURE 14B - EPP 1.9 DATA OR ADDRESS READ CYCLE TIMING PARAMETERS  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
PDATA Hi-Z to Command Asserted  
MIN  
0
TYP  
MAX  
30  
UNITS  
ns  
t1  
t2  
t3  
nIOR Asserted to PDATA Hi-Z  
0
50  
ns  
nWAIT Deasserted to Command Deasserted  
(Note 1)  
60  
180  
ns  
t4  
t5  
Command Deasserted to PDATA Hi-Z  
Command Asserted to PDATA Valid  
PDATA Hi-Z to nWAIT Deasserted  
PDATA Valid to nWAIT Deasserted  
nIOR Asserted to IOCHRDY Asserted  
nWRITE Deasserted to nIOR Asserted (Note 2)  
0
0
ns  
ns  
ms  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
t6  
0
t7  
0
t8  
0
24  
t9  
0
t10  
nWAIT Deasserted to IOCHRDY Deasserted  
(Note 1)  
60  
160  
t11  
t12  
t13  
t14  
t15  
t16  
t17  
t18  
t19  
t20  
t21  
t22  
t23  
t24  
t25  
t26  
t27  
t28  
IOCHRDY Deasserted to nIOR Deasserted  
nIOR Deasserted to SDATA Hi-Z (Hold Time)  
PDATA Valid to SDATA Valid  
0
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ms  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
40  
75  
0
nWAIT Asserted to Command Asserted  
Time Out  
0
195  
12  
10  
60  
60  
0
nWAIT Deasserted to PDATA Driven (Note 1)  
nWAIT Deasserted to nWRITE Modified (Notes 1,2)  
SDATA Valid to IOCHRDY Deasserted (Note 3)  
Ax Valid to nIOR Asserted  
190  
190  
85  
40  
10  
0
nIOR Deasserted to Ax Invalid  
10  
nWAIT Asserted to nWRITE Deasserted  
nIOR Deasserted to nIOW or nIOR Asserted  
nWAIT Asserted to PDIR Set (Note 1)  
PDATA Hi-Z to PDIR Set  
185  
40  
60  
0
185  
nWAIT Asserted to PDATA Hi-Z (Note 1)  
PDIR Set to Command  
60  
0
180  
20  
nWAIT Deasserted to PDIR Low (Note 1)  
nWRITE Deasserted to Command  
60  
1
180  
Note 1: nWAIT is considered to have settled after it does not transition for a minimum of 50 ns.  
Note 2: When not executing a write cycle, EPP nWRITE is inactive high.  
Note 3: 85 is true only if t7 = 0.  
180  
t18  
t9  
A0-A10  
SD<7:0>  
nIOW  
t17  
t8  
t6  
t19  
t12  
t10  
t20  
t11  
IOCHRDY  
nWRITE  
t2  
t5  
t13  
t1  
PD<7:0>  
t16  
t3  
t4  
nDATAST  
nADDRSTB  
t21  
nWAIT  
PDIR  
FIGURE 15A - EPP 1.7 DATA OR ADDRESS WRITE CYCLE  
SEE TIMING PARAMETERS ON NEXT PAGE  
181  
FIGURE 15B - EPP 1.7 DATA OR ADDRESS WRITE CYCLE PARAMETERS  
NAME  
t1  
DESCRIPTION  
nIOW Asserted to PDATA Valid  
MIN  
0
TYP  
MAX  
50  
UNITS  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ms  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ms  
ns  
ns  
ns  
t2  
Command Deasserted to nWRITE Change  
nWRITE to Command  
0
40  
t3  
5
35  
t4  
nIOW Deasserted to Command Deasserted (Note 2)  
Command Deasserted to PDATA Invalid  
Time Out  
50  
t5  
50  
10  
10  
0
t6  
12  
t8  
SDATA Valid to nIOW Asserted  
t9  
nIOW Deasserted to DATA Invalid  
nIOW Asserted to IOCHRDY Asserted  
nWAIT Deasserted to IOCHRDY Deasserted  
IOCHRDY Deasserted to nIOW Deasserted  
nIOW Asserted to nWRITE Asserted  
PDATA Valid to Command Asserted  
Ax Valid to nIOW Asserted  
t10  
t11  
t12  
t13  
t16  
t17  
t18  
t19  
t20  
t21  
0
24  
40  
10  
0
50  
35  
10  
40  
10  
100  
nIOW Deasserted to Ax Invalid  
nIOW Deasserted to nIOW or nIOR Asserted  
nWAIT Asserted to IOCHRDY Deasserted  
Command Deasserted to nWAIT Deasserted  
45  
0
Note 1: nWRITE is controlled by clearing the PDIR bit to "0" in the control register before performing  
an EPP Write.  
Note 2: The number is only valid if nWAIT is active when IOW goes active.  
182  
t20  
A0-A10  
nIOR  
t15  
t11  
t22  
t19  
t13  
t12  
SD<7:0>  
t8  
t10  
t3  
IOCHRDY  
nWRITE  
t5  
t4  
PD<7:0>  
t23  
t2  
nDATASTB  
nADDRSTB  
t21  
nWAIT  
PDIR  
FIGURE 16A - EPP 1.7 DATA OR ADDRESS READ CYCLE  
SEE TIMING PARAMETERS ON NEXT PAGE  
183  
FIGURE 16B - EPP 1.7 DATA OR ADDRESS READ CYCLE PARAMETERS  
NAME  
t2  
DESCRIPTION  
nIOR Deasserted to Command Deasserted  
nWAIT Asserted to IOCHRDY Deasserted  
Command Deasserted to PDATA Hi-Z  
Command Asserted to PDATA Valid  
nIOR Asserted to IOCHRDY Asserted  
nWAIT Deasserted to IOCHRDY Deasserted  
IOCHRDY Deasserted to nIOR Deasserted  
nIOR Deasserted to SDATA High-Z (Hold Time)  
PDATA Valid to SDATA Valid  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
50  
UNITS  
ns  
t3  
0
0
0
40  
ns  
t4  
ns  
t5  
ns  
t8  
24  
50  
ns  
t10  
t11  
t12  
t13  
t15  
t19  
t20  
t21  
t22  
t23  
ns  
0
0
ns  
40  
40  
12  
ns  
ns  
Time Out  
10  
40  
10  
0
ms  
Ax Valid to nIOR Asserted  
ns  
nIOR Deasserted to Ax Invalid  
ns  
Command Deasserted to nWAIT Deasserted  
nIOR Deasserted to nIOW or nIOR Asserted  
nIOR Asserted to Command Asserted  
ns  
40  
ns  
55  
ns  
Note:  
WRITE is controlled by setting the PDIR bit to "1" in the control register before performing an  
EPP Read.  
184  
ECP PARALLEL PORT TIMING  
PeriphAck (Busy) high to acknowledge the  
Parallel Port FIFO (Mode 101)  
handshake. The host then sets HostClk  
(nStrobe) high. The peripheral then accepts  
the data and sets PeriphAck (Busy) low,  
The standard parallel port is run at or near the  
peak 500KBytes/sec allowed in the forward  
direction using DMA. The state machine does  
not examine nACK and begins the next transfer  
based on Busy. Refer to Figure 18.  
completing the transfer. This sequence is shown  
in Figure 18.  
ECP Parallel Port Timing  
The timing is designed to provide 3 cable  
round-trip times for data setup if Data is driven  
simultaneously with HostClk (nStrobe).  
The timing is designed to allow operation at  
approximately 2.0 Mbytes/sec over a 15ft cable.  
If a shorter cable is used then the bandwidth  
will increase.  
Reverse-Idle Phase  
The peripheral has no data to send and keeps  
PeriphClk high. The host is idle and keeps  
HostAck low.  
Forward-Idle  
When the host has no data to send it keeps  
HostClk (nStrobe) high and the peripheral will  
leave PeriphClk (Busy) low.  
Reverse Data Transfer Phase  
The interface transfers data and commands  
from the peripheral to the host using an inter-  
locked HostAck and PeriphClk.  
Forward Data Transfer Phase  
The interface transfers data and commands  
from the host to the peripheral using an inter-  
locked PeriphAck and HostClk. The peripheral  
may indicate its desire to send data to the host  
by asserting nPeriphRequest.  
The Reverse Data Transfer Phase may be en-  
tered from the Reverse-Idle Phase. After the  
previous byte has beed accepted the host sets  
HostAck (nALF) low. The peripheral then sets  
PeriphClk (nACK) low when it has data to send.  
The data must be stable for the specified setup  
time prior to the falling edge of PeriphClk. When  
the host is ready to accept a byte it sets  
HostAck (nALF) high to acknowledge the  
handshake. The peripheral then sets PeriphClk  
(nACK) high. After the host has accepted the  
data it sets HostAck (nALF) low, completing the  
transfer. This sequence is shown in Figure 19.  
The Forward Data Transfer Phase may be  
entered from the Forward-Idle Phase. While in  
the Forward Phase the peripheral may  
asynchronously assert the nPeriphRequest  
(nFault) to request that the channel be reversed.  
When the peripheral is not busy it sets  
PeriphAck (Busy) low. The host then sets  
HostClk (nStrobe) low when it is prepared to  
send data. The data must be stable for the  
specified setup time prior to the falling edge of  
HostClk.  
The  
peripheral  
then  
sets  
185  
specified as open-collector), the drivers are  
dynamically changed from open-collector to  
totem-pole. The timing for the dynamic driver  
change is specified in then IEEE 1284  
Extended Capabilities Port Protocol and ISA  
Interface Standard, Rev. 1.14, July 14, 1993,  
available from Microsoft. The dynamic driver  
change must be implemented properly to  
prevent glitching the outputs.  
Output Drivers  
To facilitate higher performance data transfer,  
the use of balanced CMOS active drivers for  
critical signals (Data, HostAck, HostClk,  
PeriphAck, PeriphClk) are used ECP Mode.  
Because the use of active drivers can present  
compatibility  
Mode (the control signals, by tradition, are  
problems  
in Compatible  
t6  
t3  
PDATA  
t1  
t2  
t5  
nSTROBE  
t4  
BUSY  
FIGURE 17 - PARALLEL PORT FIFO TIMING  
NAME  
t1  
DESCRIPTION  
DATA Valid to nSTROBE Active  
MIN  
600  
600  
450  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
ns  
t2  
nSTROBE Active Pulse Width  
ns  
t3  
DATA Hold from nSTROBE Inactive (Note 1)  
nSTROBE Active to BUSY Active  
BUSY Inactive to nSTROBE Active  
BUSY Inactive to PDATA Invalid (Note 1)  
ns  
t4  
500  
ns  
t5  
680  
80  
ns  
t6  
ns  
Note 1: The data is held until BUSY goes inactive or for time t3, whichever is longer. This only  
applies if another data transfer is pending. If no other data transfer is pending, the data is  
held indefinitely.  
186  
t3  
t4  
nAUTOFD  
PDATA<7:0>  
t2  
t1  
t7  
t8  
nSTROBE  
BUSY  
t6  
t5  
t6  
FIGURE 18 - ECP PARALLEL PORT FORWARD TIMING  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
MIN  
0
TYP  
MAX  
60  
UNITS  
ns  
t1  
t2  
t3  
nAUTOFD Valid to nSTROBE Asserted  
PDATA Valid to nSTROBE Asserted  
0
60  
ns  
BUSY Deasserted to nAUTOFD Changed  
(Notes 1,2)  
80  
180  
ns  
t4  
t5  
t6  
t7  
t8  
BUSY Deasserted to PDATA Changed (Notes 1,2)  
nSTROBE Deasserted to Busy Asserted  
80  
0
180  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
nSTROBE Deasserted to Busy Deasserted  
0
BUSY Deasserted to nSTROBE Asserted (Notes 1,2)  
BUSY Asserted to nSTROBE Deasserted (Note 2)  
80  
80  
200  
180  
Note 1: Maximum value only applies if there is data in the FIFO waiting to be written out.  
Note 2: BUSY is not considered asserted or deasserted until it is stable for a minimum of 75 to 130  
ns.  
187  
t2  
PDATA<7:0>  
t1  
t5  
t6  
nACK  
t4  
t3  
t4  
nAUTOFD  
FIGURE 19 - ECP PARALLEL PORT REVERSE TIMING  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
MIN  
0
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
ns  
t1  
t2  
t3  
PDATA Valid to nACK Asserted  
nAUTOFD Deasserted to PDATA Changed  
0
ns  
nACK Asserted to nAUTOFD Deasserted  
(Notes 1,2)  
80  
200  
200  
ns  
t4  
t5  
t6  
nACK Deasserted to nAUTOFD Asserted (Note 2)  
nAUTOFD Asserted to nACK Asserted  
80  
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
nAUTOFD Deasserted to nACK Deasserted  
0
Note 1: Maximum value only applies if there is room in the FIFO and terminal count has not been  
received. ECP can stall by keeping nAUTOFD low.  
Note 2: nACK is not considered asserted or deasserted until it is stable for a minimum of 75 to 130  
ns.  
188  
DATA  
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
t2  
t1  
t2  
t1  
IRRX  
n IRRX  
Parameter  
min  
typ  
max  
units  
t1 Pulse Width at 115kbaud  
t1 Pulse Width at 57.6kbaud  
t1 Pulse Width at 38.4kbaud  
t1 Pulse Width at 19.2kbaud  
t1 Pulse Width at 9.6kbaud  
t1 Pulse Width at 4.8kbaud  
t1 Pulse Width at 2.4kbaud  
t2 Bit Time at 115kbaud  
t2 Bit Time at 57.6kbaud  
t2 Bit Time at 38.4kbaud  
t2 Bit Time at 19.2kbaud  
t2 Bit Time at 9.6kbaud  
1.4  
1.4  
1.4  
1.4  
1.4  
1.4  
1.4  
1.6  
3.22  
4.8  
2.71  
3.69  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
5.53  
9.7  
11.07  
22.13  
44.27  
88.55  
19.5  
39  
78  
8.68  
17.4  
26  
52  
104  
208  
416  
t2 Bit Time at 4.8kbaud  
t2 Bit Time at 2.4kbaud  
Notes:  
1. Receive Pulse Detection Criteria: A received pulse is considered detected if the  
received pulse is a minimum of 1.41µs.  
2. IRRX: L5, CRF1 Bit 0: 1 = RCV active low  
nIRRX: L5, CRF1 Bit 0: 0 = RCV active high (default)  
FIGURE 20 - IrDA RECEIVE TIMING  
189  
DATA  
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
t2  
t1  
t1  
t2  
IRTX  
n IRTX  
Parameter  
min  
typ  
max  
units  
t1  
t1  
t1  
t1  
t1  
t1  
t1  
t2  
t2  
t2  
t2  
t2  
t2  
t2  
Pulse Width at 115kbaud  
Pulse Width at 57.6kbaud  
Pulse Width at 38.4kbaud  
Pulse Width at 19.2kbaud  
Pulse Width at 9.6kbaud  
Pulse Width at 4.8kbaud  
Pulse Width at 2.4kbaud  
Bit Time at 115kbaud  
Bit Time at 57.6kbaud  
Bit Time at 38.4kbaud  
Bit Time at 19.2kbaud  
Bit Time at 9.6kbaud  
1.41  
1.41  
1.41  
1.41  
1.41  
1.41  
1.41  
1.6  
2.71  
3.69  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
3.22  
4.8  
9.7  
19.5  
39  
5.53  
11.07  
22.13  
44.27  
88.55  
78  
8.68  
17.4  
26  
52  
104  
208  
416  
Bit Time at 4.8kbaud  
Bit Time at 2.4kbaud  
Notes:  
1. IrDA @ 115k is HPSIR compatible. IrDA @ 2400 will allow compatibility with HP95LX  
and 48SX.  
2. IRTX: L5, CRF1 Bit 1: 1 = XMIT active low (default)  
nIRTX: L5, CRF1 Bit 1: 0 = XMIT active high  
FIGURE 21 - IrDA TRANSMIT TIMING  
190  
DATA  
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
t1  
t2  
IRRX  
n IRRX  
t3 t4  
MIRRX  
t5 t6  
nMIRRX  
Parameter  
min  
typ  
max  
units  
t1  
t2  
t3  
t4  
t5  
t6  
Modulated Output Bit Time  
Off Bit Time  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
Modulated Output "On"  
Modulated Output "Off"  
Modulated Output "On"  
Modulated Output "Off"  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
1
1
1
1
1.2  
1.2  
1.2  
1.2  
Notes:  
1. IRRX: L5, CRF1 Bit 0: 1 = RCV active low  
nIRRX: L5, CRF1 Bit 0: 0 = RCV active high (default)  
MIRRX, nMIRRX are the modulated outputs  
FIGURE 22 - AMPLITUDE SHIFT KEYED IR RECEIVE TIMING  
191  
DATA  
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
t1  
t2  
IRTX  
n
t3 t4  
MIRTX  
t5 t6  
nMIRTX  
Parameter  
min  
typ  
max  
units  
t1  
t2  
t3  
t4  
t5  
t6  
Modulated Output Bit Time  
Off Bit Time  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
Modulated Output "On"  
Modulated Output "Off"  
Modulated Output "On"  
Modulated Output "Off"  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
1
1
1
1
1.2  
1.2  
1.2  
1.2  
Notes:  
1. IRTX: L5, CRF1 Bit 1: 1 = XMIT active low (default)  
nIRTX: L5, CRF1 Bit 1: 0 = XMIT active high  
MIRTX, nMIRTX are the modulated outputs  
FIGURE 23 - AMPLITUDE SHIFT KEYED IR TRANSMIT TIMING  
192  
D
D1  
E
E1  
e
W
A
A2  
TD/TE  
H
0
0.10  
A1  
L
-C-  
L1  
DIM  
MIN  
2.80  
0.1  
MAX  
3.15  
0.45  
2.87  
24.15  
20.1  
18.15  
14.1  
0.2  
MIN  
.110  
.004  
.101  
.921  
.783  
.685  
.547  
.004  
.026  
.071  
MAX  
Notes:  
.124  
.018  
.113  
.951  
.791  
.715  
.555  
A
1) Coplanarity is 0.100mm (.004") maximum.  
A1  
A2  
D
2) Tolerance on the position of the leads is  
0.200mm (.008") maximum.  
2.57  
23.4  
19.9  
17.4  
13.9  
0.1  
3) Package body dimensions D1 and E1 do not  
include the mold protrusion. Maximum mold  
protrusion is 0.25mm (.010").  
D1  
E
E1  
4) Dimensions TD and TE are important for testing  
by robotic handler. Only above combinations of (1)  
or (2) are acceptable.  
H
L
.008  
.037  
.102  
0.65  
1.8  
0.95  
2.6  
L1  
e
0
5) Controlling dimension: millimeter. Dimensions  
in inches for reference only and not necessarily  
accurate.  
0.65 BSC  
.0256 BSC  
0°  
.2  
12°  
.4  
0°  
.008  
.858  
.622  
.874  
.641  
12°  
.016  
.874  
.638  
.896  
.662  
W
21.8  
15.8  
22.2  
16.2  
TD(1)  
TE(1)  
TD(2)  
TE(2)  
22.21  
16.27  
22.76  
16.82  
FIGURE 24 - 100 PIN QFP PACKAGE OUTLINE  
193  
FDC37C67x ERRATA SHEET  
DATE  
REVISED  
PAGE  
6
SECTION/FIGURE/ENTRY  
CORRECTION  
Pin #90 added to Pin-Out  
See Italicized Text  
Pin Configuration  
Tape Drive Register (TDR)  
Table 4  
6/9/97  
6/9/97  
6/9/97  
6/9/97  
20  
20  
See Italicized Text  
135  
Table 52 - Hard Reset  
See Italicized Text  
Circuit diagrams utilizing SMSC products are included as a means of illustrating  
typical applications; consequently complete information sufficient for construction  
purposes is not necessarily given. The information has been carefully checked  
and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for  
inaccuracies. Furthermore, such information does not convey to the purchaser of  
the semiconductor devices described any licenses under the patent rights of  
SMSC or others. SMSC reserves the right to make changes at any time in order to  
improve design and supply the best product possible. SMSC products are not  
designed, intended, authorized or warranted for use in any life support or other  
application where product failure could cause or contribute to personal injury or  
severe property damage. Any and all such uses without prior written approval of  
an Officer of SMSC and further testing and/or modification will be fully at the risk of  
the customer.  
1997© STANDARD  
CORP.  
MICROSYSTEMS  
FDC37C67x Rev. 6/9/97  

相关型号:

FDC37C67XQFP

Micro Peripheral IC, CMOS, PQFP100
SMSC

FDC37C68X

Peripheral (Multifunction) Controller
ETC

FDC37C75LJP

Floppy Disk Controller
ETC

FDC37C77

Peripheral IC
ETC

FDC37C78

Floppy Disk Controller
SMSC

FDC37C78-HT

Floppy Disk Controller
MICROCHIP

FDC37C78TQFP

Floppy Disk Drive, 0.25MBps, CMOS, PQFP48, TQFP-48
SMSC

FDC37C78_07

Floppy Disk Controller
SMSC

FDC37C922

Peripheral IC
ETC

FDC37C93

Plug and Play Compatible Ultra I/O⑩ Controller with Soft Power Management
SMSC

FDC37C932FR

Multifunction Peripheral, CMOS, PQFP160, QFP-160
SMSC

FDC37C935

Multifunction Peripheral, CMOS, PQFP16, QFP-160
SMSC